JP2022190018A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it possible to cause a movable accessory to perform a linear motion in a larger operation range, while making the installation space of a drive mechanism smaller.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a movable decoration body 1110 configured to be operable before a liquid crystal display device; a left transmission arm 1154 and a right transmission arm 1164 for supporting the movable decoration body 1110 from both sides; and a left drive transmission member and a right drive transmission member for transmitting the power from a motor to each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. Each of the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member is housed in a smaller range, when viewed from the front, on both sides of the liquid crystal display device than the operation range of the movable decoration body 1110. The left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164, while performing an arc motion with each of one ends as a fulcrum, support the movable decorative body 1110 from both sides slidably at each of the other ends.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, there is a game machine in which a movable accessory is operated to enhance the performance effect as an expectation performance for making the player expect that the result of the win-lose determination is advantageous. A game machine in which a movable accessory is activated to enhance the performance effect is disclosed in Patent Document 1, for example. The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 is provided with a plurality of motors for operating the plurality of movable accessories, respectively, in order to operate the plurality of movable accessories.

JP 2014-76208 A

However, in recent years, there has been an increasing demand for productions using movable accessories, such as productions using more movable accessories and productions using large-sized movable accessories. It is necessary to increase interest by securing space and not complicating control.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a predetermined base member (eg, base member 1180);
A movable accessory (eg, upper back accessory 1100) that can move from an initial position (eg, origin position) to a predetermined position (eg, lower end position) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the movable accessory is actuated toward the predetermined position, a connecting member (for example, the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, the lower right part, etc.) that changes its posture in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory. arm 1178);
with
The connecting member includes a first connecting portion (e.g., lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) connected to the movable accessory, and a second connecting portion (e.g., a left upper arm 1172, a right upper arm 1176),
The first connecting part is configured to be difficult to see in front view even if the posture is changed in the specific area until the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position,
The movable accessory is
a first movable part (for example, a movable decorative body 1110);
a second movable part (e.g., covering decorative body 1120) operable when the first movable part is actuated,
The second movable part is operable so that the first connecting part is difficult to see in a front view when the first connecting part changes its posture beyond the specific region, and the second connecting part is movable. is operable so that at least part of the part is difficult to see in a front view,
The first movable part has different visible regions in front view depending on whether the second movable part is in a non-operating state or in an operating state,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example which shows the front exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the diagonal upper right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special design display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. (a) An example of a table showing specifications of a special symbol game, (b) An example of a table showing specifications of a normal symbol game, (c) An example of a table showing sorting of hits, (d) An example of a table showing the types of hits An example. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of a game. It is a table showing an example of the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 3 is an example of a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main control circuit; 4 is an example of a flowchart showing system timer interrupt processing executed by a main control circuit; , is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flowchart showing a winning start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. 4 is an example of a flowchart showing a big winning opening re-open waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the hit completion|finish interval processing performed by the main control circuit. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main control circuit. 6 is an example of a flowchart showing main processing executed by a sub-control circuit; 6 is an example of a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a sub-control circuit; 4 is an example of a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by a sub-control circuit; 4 is an example of a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by a sub-control circuit; FIG. 27 is an example of a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 26; FIG. It is an example of a flowchart showing a winning start effect determination process executed in a sub-control circuit. When the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, it is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area. , is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. When the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, it is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side area. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view of a back unit 176; FIG. It is an example of the back view of the back unit 176. FIG. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 diagonally from the upper right. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view of the attacker unit 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of a side view of the attacker unit 500. FIG. FIG. 4 is an example of a plan view of an attacker unit 500; It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from the front diagonally upper right. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view showing a base member of the attacker unit 500. FIG. 5 is an example of a back view showing a front side plate portion 520 of the attacker unit 500. FIG. 5 is an example of a front cross-sectional view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the exploded cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm 630, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is at the second position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is at the first position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. FIG. It is an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing the housing portion 6001, (b) an example of a perspective view of the housing portion 6001 viewed diagonally from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the housing portion 6001 viewed from the upper right. is. (a) An example of a plan view showing the large winning opening solenoid 6003, (b) An example of a perspective view of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed diagonally from the front right, (c) The large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed diagonally from the upper right 1 is an example of a back perspective view. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing a link arm 6004, (b) An example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm 6004 from an oblique upper right direction. (a) An example of a plan view showing the regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member 6005 as seen from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member 6005 as seen from the upper right. be. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view showing the assembly structure of the special electric accessory 6000 without the accommodating portion 6001. FIG. It is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembly configuration of the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005. FIG. It is an example of a rear perspective view showing an assembly configuration of a big winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a big winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a view omitting the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly structure of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 in the closed state, (b) A diagram in which the illustration of the link arm 6004 in (a) is omitted. An example. (a) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 starts to move from the state illustrated in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) A plan view showing the assembly structure of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). FIG. 8A is an example of a schematic plan view showing a locked state by a regulating member 6005, and FIG. 7B is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state in which the locking state is released by the regulating member 6005. FIG. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from the front diagonally upper right. This is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as seen obliquely from the upper left rear. It is a figure which shows the normal electric accessories 460, the 2nd start-up switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. It is an example of the back view which looked at the normal electric accessory 460 from the upper right diagonally. A mode of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by a dashed line), and an ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a state of transition from the closed state to the open state. 1 is an example of a rear view showing a mode (indicated by a solid line). The aspect of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in transition (illustrated by the dashed line), and the aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (illustrated by the solid line). It is a rear view showing the. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, (A) a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is blocked from opening, (B) FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open; It is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory 1000 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory 1000 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position; FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decoration 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the back diagonally upper left. 83(A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). FIG. 83 (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A). Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. After the upper back accessory 1100 starts to operate, it is a diagram showing an example of the state before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. FIG. 11A is a front view, and FIG. 11B is a rear view showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions. After the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 move the movable ornament 1110 to the paper surface. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a mode when the covering decorative body 1120 is operated downward (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts to operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. is. 11A is a front view, and FIG. 1B is a rear view, showing an example of a mode in which a covering decoration 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to a movable decoration 1110. FIG. It is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the lower part accessory 1200 from diagonally upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 12A is a front view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is at the origin position, and FIG. 12B is a rear view. , and are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10A is a front view and FIG. 1B is a back view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the operation limit. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. It is an example of the back view of the upper corner article 1320. FIG. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the back diagonally upper left. There is an example of a back view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 13B is an example of a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. 108 is an example of a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 107; FIG. It is an example of a back view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit positions. FIG. 13 is a front view of a lower corner accessory 1350; It is an example of the back view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start to operate from the origin position. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit positions. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view of the rear unit 176 showing a mode when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to their operation limit positions. The front view of the rear unit 176 showing the mode when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. An example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. An example. It is an example of a front view of a side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of a back view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 diagonally from the upper right front. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; . It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the 2nd inside panel 1550 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the second middle panel 1550 from the back diagonally upper left. (A) An example of a front view of a second middle panel 1550, (B) an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

[Configuration of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. FIG. 7 is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Also, the directions shown in the drawings are the directions when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, "left" is written in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing becomes "left" when viewed from the front. Similarly, even when "right" is written in the left direction in the drawing, "left" in the drawing becomes "right" in a front view for the same reason.

It should be noted that, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the front side is defined as the front side, and the back side is defined as the rear side. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, thereby defining the left-right direction. Furthermore, the front side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19 .

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11 . The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the dispensing unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board unit 17 on the front side. support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 22 is provided in the glass door 13 . A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged to face a game board unit 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12 . A speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged above the glass door 13 . The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for, for example, notifying with light or performing effects.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13 .

The upper tray 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 26 are shot from the shooting device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and a performance button 62. - 特許庁A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 61 to an upper tray 26.例文帳に追加The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. - 特許庁A payout port 63 is provided in the lower plate 27 . The game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26 are put out to the lower tray 27 from the payout port 63. - 特許庁

The shooting device 15 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 26 toward the game area 20 . The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 12 and the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 . The firing device 15 comprises a panel body 31 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 32 .

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15 . The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31 . The driving device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the shooting device 15, when the shooting handle 32 is operated by the player, game balls are shot by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an identification pattern (decorative pattern) for effect, a effect image during a big win, a demonstration effect image, the number of suspension times of variable display of the identification pattern, and the like. included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23 . A game area 20 is formed on the front side surface of the game board unit 17, in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is arranged substantially in the center of the transparent panel 172 forming the game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll down and the game area 20. A center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174 , the normal electric accessory unit 400 , the attacker unit 500 and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172 . The back unit 176 is provided behind the transparent panel 172 .

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which will be described later, is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172 and a game nail or the like is planted thereon. A game ball shot from a shooting device 15 jumps out from a guide rail 26 toward a game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward in the game area 20 while changing its traveling direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 26 . The inner rail 26b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26a. The inner rail 26b is arranged on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

The center unit 174 has a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right of the center rail 1742 concerned.

The game balls fired by the shooting device 15 are divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20. The game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). When it collides with a game nail or the like provided, it flows downward while changing its traveling direction. The shot game balls are distributed to the flow-down areas according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 52.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742 . The hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible for the player to distinguish between them.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the big winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 .

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 47 to the upper tray 42 (or from the payout port 48 to the lower tray 44).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later. It is performed when it is shifted to a game state or a small hit game state). In addition, the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. is indicated by the stop display mode of

The first start port 5442 gives an opportunity for hitting determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hitting determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73 described later. It gives A first starting port switch 5472 is arranged in the first starting port 5442 (see FIG. 7). When the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. - 特許庁When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a preset number of game balls are released from the payout port 61. It is dispensed (discharged) to the upper tray 26 or to the lower tray 27 from the dispensing port 63 . In addition, winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by hitting to the left.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 . The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view. Conventionally, most of the electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 5442, for example. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, making it difficult to arrange it below the first starting port 5442. FIG. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessary product unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 .

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for winning (passing) of the game ball as a condition for a hit determination, and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 to be described later. It gives A second start port switch 441 is arranged in the second start port 440 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440 , the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. to the upper tray or from the outlet 63 to the lower tray 27 (discharged). The winning difficulty of the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460 . In principle, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by hitting to the right.

Although details will be described later, the normal electric accessory 460 transmits the power of the blade member 4620 that can be rotated to the right, the starting port solenoid 4630, and the starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 74) to the blade member 4620. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIG. 74) is provided. The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state in which it is difficult to pass the game balls, by driving the vane member 4620 by the starting solenoid 4630. configured to When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball enters the second start port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620) is performed only for a predetermined period and times when the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 71 is in a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500 . The pass gate 49 is provided with a pass gate switch 49a (see FIG. 7). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). It should be noted that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the big winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right portion of the game area 20 . The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the substantially lower right part of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is such that the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the winning game state (jackpot game state or It is performed when it is shifted to a small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53 , 54 , 55 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board unit 17 , and the general winning opening 56 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 . In addition, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are arranged in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 7). When game balls enter the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). (expelled).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls of the big winning port 540 The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the central lowermost part of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flowing direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed into when the launched game ball does not win any starting port or winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 . The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display parts are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display portions, a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol reservation display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special A design pending display portion 75 and a second special symbol pending display portion 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to be in the open state according to the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in an open state, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol suspension display section 72 displays the number of execution times of suspended normal symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "suspension number of normal symbol variation display"). The normal symbol reservation display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol suspension display unit 72 displays the number of suspension times of normal symbol variation display by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the game state is determined according to the result of determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 has a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 5442 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 73a, when a predetermined condition for starting variable display is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 has a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 74a, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal The transition from the game state (normal game state) to the winning game state which is advantageous to the player is determined. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big win, the game state is shifted to a big win game state as a win game state. Also, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the game state is shifted to a small hit game state as a hit game state. Thus, in this embodiment, two types of winning game states are provided as the game state to be shifted from the normal game state.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 75 and the second special symbol reserved display unit 76 display the number of executions of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "number of times of suspension of variable display of special symbols"). to display. The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol suspension display portion 75 and the second special symbol suspension display portion 76 display the number of suspension times of special symbol variation display by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b. The display modes of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the reserved display portion 72 for normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 is for decorating the game board unit 17. The upper front accessory 1000 is arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the upper front accessory 1000 is arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back character 1100 arranged on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 36), a lower character 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 36) arranged so that movable bodies, which will be described later, are positioned at the four corners of the display area of the device 16, and arranged on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is provided with a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attack ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates the above accessories and is unitized by attaching the main board case 1700. - 特許庁The details of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 provided in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Below, in the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. Storage is suspended (variation display of the first special symbol is started). The suspension of the starting memory for the first special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 while neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display section 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second starting port 440 is started. Storage is suspended (variation display of the second special symbol is suspended). The suspension of the starting memory for the second special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 while neither the first special pattern nor the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display section 74 is started.

In addition, in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously. That is, while the special symbols are variably displayed in one of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols are not variably displayed in the other display portion. . In this embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, regardless of which starting memory is suspended first, the second special symbol Priority is given to the cancellation of the hold about the start memory of, and the second special symbol display unit 73 performs the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols due to the winning of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 .

Also, while the first or second special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for specific cases, the identification symbols consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 fluctuate. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, when the first or second special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed of the winning. An effect image to cause is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop-displayed is set corresponding to the type of win. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. form. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to the winning. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are displayed in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize them, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of winning.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
The control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling the game, and a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like.

The main CPU 101 is connected with a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102 .

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101 . In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 has a first special symbol start memory area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and the upper limit of four first special symbol games. A first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start memory area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory, and the upper limit four times of the second special game. A second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. A command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub-control circuit 200 . The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off.

Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100 .

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol pending display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special symbol pending display portion 75, A second special symbol holding display portion 76, a starting solenoid 4630 for driving the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460, and a large winning solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610 are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a first starting switch 5472, a second starting switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general prize winning switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a. . When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100 . The payout/shooting control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for putting out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18 . A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. Also, when the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the payout/shooting control circuit 300 applies power to the shooting solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation). It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, a sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106 . The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light from the lamp 25, and the like, according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. FIG.

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. It may be configured such that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100 .

The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 100 . Also, the sub-control circuit 200 is connected with a production button switch 310 that is turned on and off by operating the production button 62 .

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202 . In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100 .

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having control means is used. If so, another mode may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the programs, tables, etc. may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like, instead of being recorded in advance. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201 . In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16 . The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. It includes a D/A converter or the like that converts as

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification pattern image data showing identification patterns, background image data, image data for effect, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this manner, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24 . The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and produces sound from the speaker 24 .

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamps 25 including decorative lamps and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role product control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling the respective role products 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400. FIG. The role control circuit 207 controls the drive circuit for supplying the drive signal, the lighting circuit for supplying the lighting control signal, the operation pattern and the lighting pattern to each of the roles 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400. is stored, and has an accessory data ROM or the like.

Also, the drive circuit selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to the role product activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected motion pattern is read from the role product data ROM, and the mechanical motion of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role product data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 8(a) is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Also, FIG. 8(b) is a table showing specifications of the normal symbol game. Also, FIG. 8(c) is a table showing the distribution of winnings. FIG. 8(d) is a table showing types of hits. The data of the tables shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D are stored in the main ROM 102 as tables.

Incidentally, in the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. Thus, in the special symbol game, the game state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or a non-variable probability state). Also, in the special symbol game, a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variable state). In this way, when the game state becomes the probability variable state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

Further, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state or a low probability state. The winning probability of normal symbols in the high probability state is 100/100. The hit probability of normal symbols in the low probability state is 1/60. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is hit, the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 (normal winning game) is performed three times for 1.5 seconds per time. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the low probability state is hit, the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 (normal winning game) is performed only once for 2.0 seconds per time. In the normal symbol game, a game state in which normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state is called an electric support state. In addition, when it is not in the electric sapo state (low probability state), the time per normal symbol determination is 3.0 seconds. A game state (game state other than the time saving state) that is not an electric support state in which normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability is called a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In the electric sapo state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than in the normal state. Thus, the state in which the electric sapo state and the time per normal symbol determination is performed in a short time is referred to as a time-saving state. In addition, the high-probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured so as to be able to shift with the end of the big hit game state as a trigger. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as when the time saving state ends. In addition, the time-saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after shifting from the normal state.

In addition, as described above, the normal state is a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed with a low probability in the special symbol game, and a game state in which the normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability in the normal symbol game. there is

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 8(a).

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) is a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first start port 5442 and the second In any case of the start winning of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (1 coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (variable probability state) is 1/100 (for 200 random 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers) set. It should be noted that the small hit determination by the starting winning prize of the first starting port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small winning game is started based on the game ball winning the second starting port 440 is based on the game ball winning the first starting port 5442 and the small winning game is started. is set higher than the probability of

In addition, the number of times of ST is commonly set to 100 times even in the case of a big hit due to any of the starting winning prizes of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . It should be noted that ST (special time) is a probability variable state that ends according to the number of times (cutting times). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the variable probability state.

Note that the number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability variable state, which will be described later, is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super probability variable state. Then, it is displayed that the numerical value is incremented by 1 each time the hit judgment is repeated (the judgment result is a loss). Then, when the value of the number of times of ST reaches 100, the super probability variable state ends. Note that the initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated.

Also, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is 3, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is 1, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 is 10, and the number of prize balls for winning a prize to the big prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Also, the maximum winning count per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big winning game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum winning count per opening of the normal electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . Also, the number of small winning symbols is set to 100 in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 .

Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 8(b).

As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Also, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a hit is set to 100/100. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for a relatively long time of 1.5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8(c), distribution of big wins and small wins will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8(c), the big hits resulting from the starting winnings of the first starting port 5442 are sorted into six types of jackpot contents (jackpot types). Concretely, the big hit due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variable, substantially 10R probability variable, substantially 5R probability variable, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -1. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2, real 10R probability variation is set. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3, real 5R probability variation is set. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -4. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -6, substantially 5R normal is set.

In addition, the big hit by the starting winning prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 6 types of jackpot contents (jackpot types). Specifically, the big hit by the starting prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 15R probability variable, real low ball probability variable, special probability variable, 15R normal, real low ball probability normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2, real ball output small probability variation is set. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -3. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -4. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, the actual ball output small normal is set. In addition, special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -6.

Further, the small win is divided into two kinds of small win contents (small win types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into double open (1) and double open (2). These small hit contents are set to correspond to special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, corresponding to special figure (2) small hit -1, open twice (1) is set. In addition, 2 times open (2) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -2.

Here, the "number" column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 8(c) indicates the number of big winning symbols or the number of small winning symbols corresponding to each winning content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, The probabilities (expected values) of each distribution are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440, and the probability (expected value) of each distribution is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set such that the probabilities (expected values) of being distributed are 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of a small hit.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8(c), the special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, the special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and the special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, The number of times of time saving given after the end of each winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the winning game is completed is set differently according to the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big win determination or the small win determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 8(c) indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Furthermore, the notation of "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state in the special symbol game, that is, a maximum of 100 times of time reduction is given.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special figure (1) jackpot -1 or 6 hits , 50 times of time reduction is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of “LL” as well, when the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 hits, the number of times of shortening time is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state, in the case of a big hit due to the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit - 25% in case of 1 + special figure (1) jackpot - 10% in case of 6) 50 times of time saving is given, and the remaining 65% probability of time saving is not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the end of the small win game, in principle, the game state before the small win is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to continue to count from the number of STs related to the hit determination resulting in the small win after the small win game is finished. For example, when the 60th small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the end of the small win game. In this case, the remaining number of times of ST after the end of the small winning game is 40 times. Similarly, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the time saving state is resumed after the small win game is finished so as to continue counting from the number of times related to the hit determination of the small win.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, during the ST, if a small hit occurs at the 100th time (which is the final time of the ST), after the small hit game ends, the ST will be in a state of ending (the state before becoming a small hit is not maintained). Similarly, for example, when a small hit occurs at the 100th time during the time saving state of 100 times, the time saving state ends after the small win game ends (the state before the small win is not maintained).

Below, using FIG. 8(d), the content of the hit (the content of the big hit and the content of the small hit) will be described in detail.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the jackpot (kind of the jackpot), 15R probability change, 15R normal, substantially 10R probability change, substantially 10R normal, substantially 5R probability change, substantially 5R normal, special probability change, special normal, actual ball output Low probability variation, real ball output low normal, is provided. In addition, two-time opening (1) and (2) are provided as small hit contents (types of small wins).

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. Thus, in the 15R variable probability and the 15R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the upper limit number of game balls is set to be able to win the big winning hole 540 in all rounds.

Substantial 10R probability variation and substantial 10R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round in the 1st to 10th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 10R probability variation and the substantial 10R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big prize opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

Substantial 5R probability variation and substantial 5R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round in the 1st to 5th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 5R probability variation and the substantial 5R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

The special probability variation and special normal are set so that the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started, and the first round The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second openings, and the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round from 1, the opening seconds of the big winning hole 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability variation and special normal, when the jackpot game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings in the first round (for example, 1 per opening) It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the remaining third opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In addition, in the special probability variation and the special normal, the opening interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

Actual low ball probability change and actual low ball output normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of 15 rounds. 896 seconds, and in the 3rd to 15th rounds, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, when a big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, in the first and second rounds). , for example, is set to the extent that one game ball wins per opening, and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round). In addition, the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the actual ball payout probability variable and the actual ball payout normal.

Twice open (1) and (2) are small wins in which the big winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when a small win game is started. That is, the small winning game is to operate the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode. It is set so that it is difficult to win a prize (for example, one ball per opening) in the big prize opening 540 . It should be noted that, in double opening (1), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the first and second openings of the first round when the type of jackpot is special probability variable and special normal, and when it is a small win (twice open (1) and (2)) are set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings. That is, the opening mode of the big winning opening 540 is the same for the special probability variable and special normal, and the small win (twice open (1) and (2)) until the second opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed. set. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal jackpot game open and close the big winning port 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the first and second openings of the first round. It is something that makes

In the small wins (twice opening (1) and (2)), the winning end intervals after the second big winning opening 540 is opened are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in double opening (1), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special variable probability and the special normal, and the small winning end interval in the second opening (2) among the small winnings are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, the opening mode of the special winning prize opening 540 is set to be the same for the special probability variation, the special normal, and the small winning double opening (2) until the third opening of the special winning prize opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and special normal jackpot games are found to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal big win game are operated in the pseudo small win opening/closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a specific opening/closing mode (opening/closing mode after the big win is found) in which the big win game is found. It is something that makes

Similarly, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the type of the big hit is the actual low ball probability variable and the actual low ball probability normal, and when it is a small win (open twice The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings of (1) and (2) are set to the same 0.896 seconds. That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the small hit (open twice (1) and (2)) mean that the big winning hole 540 are set to be the same.

In addition, the inter-round interval between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the real low ball probability change and the real low ball normal, and the small hit end interval in the second round (2) of the small hits and are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the opening of the small prize twice (2) mean that the opening mode of the big winning hole 540 is maintained until the third opening of the big winning hole 540 is started. set to be the same. In this way, the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the opening of the first and second rounds of the real small winning ball probability change and the real small winning ball normal jackpot game. is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
The game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game progresses while repeating transitions to appropriate game states at predetermined timings. Here, each corresponding effect mode is set for each of the game states. Various effects are set in the effect mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and the effect of the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is performed. In this embodiment, production modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as production modes.

As shown in FIG. 9, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state). Further, when the game is in the normal game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal game state to another game state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 . Exceptionally, for example, if there is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol when the electric support state ends 100 times, the hit determination of the second special symbol in the normal game state is the maximum number of times of suspension. This is done up to 4 times, and if the judgment results in a big hit, the state will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that although the electric support state has ended in the above four times, if a big hit occurs at that time, it is possible to return to the electric support state, so it is a normal game state and the second special symbol A special performance mode different from the performance mode 1 may be used to give the player a feeling of anticipation while the hit determination is being performed.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed hitting. Also, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is a big hit and the game state shifts to the time saving (electrical sapo) state, so-called right hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electric sapo) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the start winning prize of the second start port 440. - 特許庁In addition, although the result of the jackpot determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 was a big hit, if the game state did not shift to the time saving (electrical support) state (the game state is a non-time saving (non-electrical support) state ), left-handed batting continues.

When the game state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) big hit When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probability variable state/time saving (electric support) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901, S902). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the game state after the transition is the same as the game state before the transition. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to continue (maximum 100 times) during the variable probability state.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S912, S911). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of ST and the number of times of shortening of working hours counted until reaching the jackpot are cleared. That is, the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving are counted from 0.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state described later (steps S913, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. counting is resumed (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S916 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S920, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -1 When it becomes either from 3, the game state shifts to the variable probability state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S922, S911). Further, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 When it becomes one of 6 from to, the game state shifts again to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice (1 ) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S924 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S926 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), while ST (probability change state) continues, the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S930 and S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. Then, counting is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, ST (probability variable state) continues, while the time saving (electric sapo) state ends. That is, the player hits left-handed instead of right-handed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect in the effect mode 5 is set to have the same content as the effect in the effect mode 1. Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player enters a game state (latency variable probability state) in which it is difficult to recognize that ST (variable probability state) continues. The effect of the effect mode 5 is the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability variable state has been determined.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -1 or 2, the game state shifts to the variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935, S933). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big win is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -4 or 5, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (that is, normal game state) (steps S936, S900). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S937, S951). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times, the ST (variable probability state) ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current game state (probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state) is maintained, the number of ST is not cleared, and the count is It is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production of the production mode 5 is continued.

It should be noted that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggers the effect of the effect mode 5 that is currently being performed. Specifically, when the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 times after the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes ), the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed has become the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. , the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950, S951). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes one of -1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S952, S911). In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes either from -4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S953, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice When (1) and (2) are reached, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S954 and S955; No). That is, the production of the production mode 6 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared. Counting is restarted (steps S956, S955; No).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -2 or 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -4 or -5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued along with the transition of the game state (steps S970, S900).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The normal game state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980, S900).

In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the game state shifts to a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state, so that the ST number is set to 100 times. be. Similarly, when the production mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST number is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after the ST is started), for example, if the result of the hit determination is a small hit, (in principle) the current game state is maintained after the small win game ends. , the ST count is not cleared and the count is restarted. Thus, the production of the production mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small winning game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball wins per opening. That is, when production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations reaches a predetermined number and the production mode ends (until ST ends) between), the small winning game can be played repeatedly. In this way, when the small winning game is repeated, it is possible to obtain prize balls by the small winning game and increase the number of game balls in the player's hand.

In the following, the ST in which prize balls can be obtained by a small winning game and the number of game balls at the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super variable state. In addition, after the super-probability state is reached, a game in which prize balls are obtained by a small winning game to increase the number of game balls in the player's hand is called a rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per one time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable state until the next big hit or the end of the time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, a game in which the time-saving state ends (for example, a game of 100 times or 50 times of hit determination, which will be described later) becomes a rush end condition.

In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, if the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is also in a super variable state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probable variable state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that rushes were performed consecutively (the second rush was performed).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability state is reached, the obtained balls are displayed. A detailed description of the displayed balls will be given later.

[Description of the operation of the main control circuit]
Processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selection random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big winning opening 540 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start switch 5472 or the second start switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. processing, etc. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the pass gate switch 49a, and performs processing such as storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processing in steps S13 and S14. , and the normal symbol display unit 71 are stored in the main RAM 103 with a control signal for driving the symbol display unit 71 . The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 and the normal symbol display portion 71 . Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays and stops the special symbols based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal symbol display unit 71 normally displays the symbols in a variable and stationary manner based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (eg, the calling device, the hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the big winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (normal electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 inserts game balls into various winning openings (specifically, the big winning opening 540, the first starting opening 5442, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56). determines whether or not has won a prize. When the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball has won a prize in any of the winning holes, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the prize to the payout/emission control circuit 300 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The system timer interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below with reference to FIG. The system timer interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the main processing at predetermined intervals even while the main processing is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the big-hit determination random number counter, the big-hit symbol determination random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 operates various switches (specifically, the first starting switch 5472, the second starting switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 55a). · 56a, etc.) to determine the presence or absence of signal input (that is, the presence or absence of detection of game balls in various switches). The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it determines that a game ball has been detected in any of various switches (when a game ball has won in any of various winning holes). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) game balls, the main CPU 101 transmits a big winning opening winning command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs register return processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 11 is demonstrated using FIG. In FIG. 13, numerical values written beside steps S101 to S108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes from step S101 to step S108. The numerical value is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103 .

In step S100, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

Note that in steps S101 to S108 described later, the main CPU 101 executes steps corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and depending on the determination result, performs each step at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is progressed. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 at predetermined intervals.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 changes the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has passed. , and set the waiting time after determination (eg, 600 ms) to the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the processing of step S103 after the post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time has elapsed after confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big win or small win). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the win determination is a win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating win start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the win start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the winning start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs winning start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal for opening the big winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating winning start interval management and the time corresponding to the winning start interval has passed. , to the big winning opening solenoid 620 . As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 540 .

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) as a big winning opening opening time timer. set to That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 increments the counter for the number of openings of the large winning opening when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management for reopening the large winning opening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning hole is open. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0" is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (it is the final round) is met. If it is the final round, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval to the control state flag, and if it is not the final round, sets a value (05H) indicating waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. Set the control state flag. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs winning end interval processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval and the time corresponding to the winning end interval has elapsed. Set the status flags. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to proceed with the special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", and "07H" when the result of the hit determination is "loss" when the game state is not a big win or a small win game state. By setting them in order, the processes of steps S101, S102, S103, and S108 shown in FIG. 13 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the game state is not a big win or a small win game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" when the result of the win determination is a big win or a small win. By setting in order, the process of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 13 is performed at a predetermined timing, and control to a big hit or a small hit game state is performed. Further, when the control to the big win or small win game state is performed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H" and "05H" in order, thereby performing steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. is performed at a predetermined timing to play a big win or a small win game. Further, when the condition for ending the big win or small win game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H", "06H", and "07H" in this order, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of steps S107 and S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big win or small win game is finished.

[Special symbol memory check process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag does not indicate the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is start memory. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If the data (random number value for hit determination) is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is starting memory (more specifically, starting memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits the execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state where the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. A demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, a demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is changed as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as the variation state number. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) to the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs big hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values for a big hit (big hit determination values) based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, a high probability hit (jackpot) determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, a jackpot determination is performed. A normal hit (jackpot) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state), the probability of shifting to the jackpot game state is improved than normal.

Then, the main CPU 101 extracts at the time of starting winning, and the random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). and the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big win when the hit determination random number value and the big win determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a big win (losing) when the hit determination random value and the big win determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to establish a big win game state advantageous to the player (big win determination) in the big win determination process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs small hit determination processing. Incidentally, the small hit determination process is performed when the big hit is not determined in the big hit determination process in step S118. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the preset It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small win when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small win (losing) when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small-hit game state (small-hit determination) in the small-hit determination process.

In this embodiment, as a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation use) are prepared, As a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation) are prepared, and a total of four types of hit determination are prepared. A table is provided. The two types of normal hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of high probability hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (for probability variation), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (variable probability), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, is the same. is. In this way, the main CPU 101 is provided with the condition that the game ball has passed through the starting area (the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440). A first winning game state, a second winning game state in which a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first winning game state, and a third winning game state in which game balls equivalent to the second winning game state can be obtained. It is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a game state.

It should be noted that the small hit probability due to winning to the first starting port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hitting probability due to winning to the second starting port 440 . The jackpot probability by winning the first starting port 5442 in the normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability by winning the second starting port 440 .

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, any one of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines a big win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a big win, determines a small win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a small win, and determines neither a big win nor a small win. That is, in the case of losing, a losing pattern is determined. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the hit determination result determined in the process of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines the variable display mode of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the data indicating such variation patterns.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 . As a result, the special symbols are variably displayed in the determined variation pattern in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 . In addition, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, by the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern designation command is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S<b>123 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103 . A special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The sub-control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 14 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the variation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the first special symbol as the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big-hit symbol data and the big-hit symbol command of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 73 . The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol and stops and displays the first special symbol in a mode based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the first special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol big-hit symbol based on the big-hit symbol determination random number extracted from the big-hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a second special symbol jackpot symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol as the small winning symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big winning symbol determining counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small winning symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol small winning symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a small winning symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting winning start interval display time data corresponding to winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the winning start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data relating to the number of openings of the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data related to the number of openings of the big winning openings in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the missing symbol and the command of the missing symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and displays the first special symbol display section according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display part 73 or the second special symbol display part 74 variably displays the special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the missing symbol of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification pattern is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in a display mode in which there is no loss. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. Symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stoppage. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big win determination is not a big win, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>303 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag of the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

At step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination at step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S<b>306 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S325.

In step S<b>308 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S<b>309 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time saving end command in the main RAM 103 . The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the time-saving end. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S<b>326 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S310.

In step S<b>328 , the main CPU 101 clears the ST count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S<b>329 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103 . The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S311, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (03H) indicating a win start interval management process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a winning start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the winning start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, the hit start interval time is also determined for each type of hit, but in the present embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball output low probability variation, real ball output low normal and special figure (2) small hit -2 The winning start interval time is set to be the same or to a time (for example, 1 second) that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S314.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big win start command or a small win start command corresponding to the special symbol. A big-hit start command or a small-hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (07H) indicating special symbol game end processing as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the process proceeds to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

At step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>403 , the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 .

In step S<b>404 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening/closing pattern for each round or a small win according to the type of the big win symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S<b>406 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the first round. The display command during opening of the large winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command during opening of the large winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S<b>408 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S<b>409 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S<b>410 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner drive the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Big Winning Gate Reopen Wait Time Management Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening re-open waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the big winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>502 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S<b>503 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during the opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the second round and the subsequent rounds. The display command data during opening of the big winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to increase the round counter by one. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the processing for opening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S<b>506 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S<b>507 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S<b>508 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Grand Prize Opening Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is not equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a big winning opening opening/closing process according to the set opening/closing pattern for each round or small win. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 according to the opening/closing pattern for each round or for the small win set in step S405. Specifically, a process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the big winning opening 540 every round or according to the opening/closing pattern of the small win. I do. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S603.

Here, in this embodiment, the special probability variation, the interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round of the special normal, the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit -2 The interval time between openings is the same or is set to a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in the process of step S602, special odds, special normal, special figure (2) small hit -2 is "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open will be executed in the order of time. Also, although it is not processed in this step but set in step S607, the interval time between the rounds of the first round and the second round of the actual low ball probability change and the real low ball output normal is the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "open time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → 2 rounds of 0.896 seconds eye open time”. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the types of winnings based on the time period during which the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process moves to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting big winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner will cause the grand prize opening solenoid 620 to be in a closed state. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the process proceeds to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the count value of the number of opening times of the large winning opening is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of opening times of the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the count value of the number of opening times of the big winning prize stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper limit number of opening times of the big winning prize or more. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (05H) indicative of waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S<b>609 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the winning end interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S<b>612 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a big win end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small win, a small win end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small win end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the winning end interval is "0". or not. If the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S702, and if the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", ends this subroutine.

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 to the control state flag. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S703.

In step S<b>703 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big win symbols or small win symbols and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, as the control data, game states such as a normal game state and a variable probability state are set. Also, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 13 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating special symbol game end processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is shifted to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
The processing of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and performs various processing such as display processing by the sub-CPU 201 .

[Sub-control main processing]
First, sub-control main processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 upon power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates random numbers stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, random numbers for determining the effect, random numbers for determining the jackpot effect, random numbers for determining stop symbols, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes commands stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 . The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 generates various data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the received data. image data is read out from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read out from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound/lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs role product control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the actions (mechanical actions and lighting actions) of the respective role products 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 via the role product control circuit 207. FIG. When the sub-CPU 201 completes the control processing of the actions of the respective role products 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400, the processing moves to the random value update processing of step S1102 again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 24 is being performed, there are cases where the sub-control main process is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is performed. Timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203 . Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs effect button switch input detection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S201 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 24 is being executed, there are cases where the sub-control main processing is interrupted and command interrupt processing is performed. Command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 stores the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S1301 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis processing) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 23 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, the process moves to step S1402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no received command, it ends this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 reads the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads commands stored in the receive buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening winning command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the big winning opening winning command, the process moves to step S1404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special winning opening winning command, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big hit. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of prize balls won by the player by winning the game ball into the big prize opening 540 (the number of winning game balls). It should be noted that the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big win start counting (counting) with the start of the big win game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of winning balls is obtained each time a big win or a small win is made. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol specifying command, the process moves to step S1406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special symbol specifying command, the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol and the extracted random number for determining effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning start command (big winning start command, small winning start command). In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a winning start command (big winning starting command, small winning starting command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a winning start command (a big winning start command, a small winning start command), the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a jackpot start effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an effect display command during opening of the big winning opening. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a time saving end command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Flow of game balls]
Below, the flow of game balls shot toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. FIG. 29 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 30 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 31 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 . Therefore, in the jackpot game state, so-called right hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is in the open state by the shutter 610, the game ball hit to the right tends to enter the large winning opening 540.例文帳に追加In addition, even if it is not in the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting is performed during the electric sapo.

However, when the player hits to the right, the game ball flowing down the right area loses the sense of anticipation when it does not enter the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. becomes. Therefore, when a game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, the player feels disadvantageous, which causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that places where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be arranged within the game area 20 are limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged below the game area 20 as in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, if the game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, it will flow into the out hole 57 as it is.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left portion of the game area 20 as described above. In addition, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. - 特許庁This game ball guide member 580, including the guide nail 700, guides a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 in the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It leads to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left area beyond the center, and is a member that forms the path of the game ball extended on the extension line of the big winning opening 540 toward the flowing direction of the game ball. is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is the area where the game ball can be received into the second start opening 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as "second start opening reception area). This second starting opening receiving area is, for example, the peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

In addition, in the game area 20, a game ball guide member is provided as a flow-down path for a game ball that is struck to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A guide nail 700 forms a flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 . Then, the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second starting opening receiving area before reaching the out opening 57. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to a high probability state with the end of the jackpot game state as a trigger, the electric sapo state is in the time saving state, and the blade member 4620 is frequently be released.

As shown in FIG. 29, when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not enter the big winning hole 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting opening receiving area upstream of the vane member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 .

Of the game balls hit right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not win the big winning opening 540 are always guided to the second start opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620, so the second If the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open when the game ball is guided to the starting port receiving area, it is received by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second starting port 440 are more likely to win prizes. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the out port 57 is replaced with the second The starting port 440 is at the most downstream position. Thus, the blade member 4620 has the function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20 .

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowed down the right area) does not enter the big winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second start opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620) Since the player is guided, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

In particular, right-handed hitting is performed in the electric sapo state. Therefore, although the big winning opening 540 does not open during the electric sapo, the blade member 4620 changes the most downstream position from the out opening 57 to the second start opening 440, so the game progresses in the electric sapo state. It can be promoted and increase interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 30, when the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning hole 540 , is always guided upstream of the blade member 4620, but flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Of the game balls struck to the right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not reach the big winning opening 540 ) may be configured to be led to the out port 57 . At this time, among the game balls hit to the right, game balls that did not enter the big winning hole 540 are game balls that reached the big winning hole 540 but did not win, and game balls that did not reach the big winning hole 540. Although there are game balls that did not win, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 31, a left-handed game ball (a game ball that flows down the left area) generally wins the first starting hole 5442 or the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, or It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450 . After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 rolling in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a feeling of winning the prize to the first start port 5442, but it goes to the first start port 5442. As for the game ball 2226 that has deviated from the flow path 222 and has not won any of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, the conventional pachinko machine uses the first starting port (corresponding to the first starting port 5442 of the present embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize will be lost. Also, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if it does not win the first starting port 5442, the expectation of winning is lost at that time. In this embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (game ball flowing down the left region) rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not enter the first start port 5442, and , Even if it does not win any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 after deviating from the flow path 222 heading to the first starting opening 5442, these game balls will reach the out opening 57 In between, it necessarily goes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620, if the blade member 4620 is open, it is the area (second start opening receiving area) where it is possible to receive the game ball to the second start opening 440, so the second When rolling in the flow path 222 toward one starting port 5442 but not winning the first starting port 5442, and when deviating from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and further general winning ports 53, 54, 55 Even if the player does not win the prize at the second starting port 440, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 will be opened when the ball is hit left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time saving state ends, the variable display of normal symbols may be suspended. Also, even if the player hits left, a game ball that has vigorously jumped into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 prevents not only the game ball that has flowed down in the right side area but also the game ball that has rolled to the side of the guide member 700 due to excess momentum from the game ball that has flowed down in the left side area, and immediately flows into the out port 57. Since it has a suppressing function, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility of winning the second starting port 440 . Therefore, even if the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 for the left-handed game ball is lost, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 continues. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In this embodiment, the pass gate 49 is arranged in the right area, but instead of this, the pass gate 491 may be arranged in the left area. In this case, there is a possibility that the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened is increased compared to the case where the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue the winning of the second starting port 440 with a higher expectation. .

Among the left-handed game balls (game balls that flowed down in the left region), as game balls that did not reach above the normal electric accessory unit 400 or did not reach the first start port 5442, for example It may be configured so that there is a game ball that has flowed down the flow path leading to the out port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 66) or the out port 57 existing below the normal electric accessory unit 400 . At this time, among the left-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the first start port 5442 are the game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first start port 5442, and the normal Although there are game balls that have reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first start port 5442 but have not won, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or Only one game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620 .

In addition, when the game ball that rolls in the direction of the big winning hole 540 among the left-handed game balls (the game ball that has flowed down in the left area) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball moves to the big winning hole 540 The shutter 610 or the rib provided on the game ball guide member 580 is collided with to enter the first starting port 5442 or flow into the out 55 or out port 450.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is always placed on the left side beyond the center of the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It has a game ball guiding member 580 that leads to the second starting port receiving area of the area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 is such a game ball (a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540), a function that necessarily leads to the second start opening receiving area , and may be limited to leading beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left area. For example, the game ball guiding member 580 has the function of guiding such a game ball to the left area, but the game ball guided to the left area is further distributed to a plurality of areas including the second start opening receiving area. The configuration is equivalent.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is guided to the left area by the game ball guide member 580. The game ball guide member 580 is not necessarily essential, and for example, the game ball that is hit to the right and has not entered the big winning opening 540 may be guided to the left area only by the guide nail.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball guide member is used as a flow path for a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57 It is designed to In this embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left area, the game ball flowing down the above flow path is always guided to the left area. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the path always passes through the second starting hole receiving area before reaching the out hole 57, in such a case, the second starting hole 440 is located in the left side area. Being placed is not essential.

[Construction of back unit]
The configuration of the rear unit 176 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37. FIG. FIG. 32 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 33 is an example of a rear view of the rear unit 176. FIG. FIG. 34 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as seen obliquely from the front right. FIG. 35 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper left of the rear surface. FIG. 36 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 37 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the rear upper left.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front component 1000, an upper back component 1100, a lower component 1200, a corner component 1300, a side component 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attack ball gutter 1600. , a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800 . Note that the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350 .

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in this opening 1820 .

The upper rear accessory 1100 (more specifically, a base member 1180 (see, for example, FIG. 84), which will be described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (more specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 92) described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (more specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (see, for example, FIG. 116), which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . The details of the side role item 1400 will be described later.

The upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 100) is placed in front of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110 so that the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1330 is positioned at the front side. The bodies 1340 are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned at the upper right corners of the liquid crystal display device 16, respectively. The lower corner accessory 1350 is located forward of the lower accessory 1200, with the third movable body 1355 positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 positioned at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. , are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (more specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 84), which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be arranged on the front side of the upper back accessory 1000. be. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 behind the transparent panel 172 , and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550 . The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member having a picture or pattern on the front surface, and the picture or pattern on the front surface can be seen through the transparent panel 172 . The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described later in detail, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears in the opening window when predetermined conditions are met. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attack ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that receives the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 56 and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 . In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the big prize opening 540 are merged and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

The main board case 1700 accommodates a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first ornamental design 1900 and a second ornamental design 1920 . The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the front right side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the front left side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both of them have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker Unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 38 to 49. FIG.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510 , a front side plate portion 520 , a guideway 530 , a big winning opening 540 , a rear side case 550 and a special electric accessory 600 .

A base member 510 shown in FIGS. 38 to 43, 45 and 46 is a base member of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIGS. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction and its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510 . A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510 .

The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape extending while gently sloping from right to left in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guiding portion 611 of the shutter 610 ), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511 .

The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 38 to 42 and 44 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIGS. The front side plate portion 520 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510 . The front side plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and is arranged in a state spaced forward from the base member 510 . In this way, between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric role space R2") is formed which is large enough for a game ball to enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is made of a transparent resin material, and the rear side of the front side plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 38 and 40 to 46 properly guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 520 . The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 , a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533 .

It should be noted that the guideway 530 (more specifically, the first guideway 531) is formed by the shutter 610 as described above. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable back and forth with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511 . In such a configuration of the shutter 610 , the first guiding path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510 . Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made on the assumption that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guideway 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end of the special electric role space R2. The first guideway 531 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The length in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the first guide path 531 is slightly shorter than that of the base member 510 . The left end of the first guideway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the special electric role space R2. The right end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric role space R2. The first guiding path 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guideway 531 has a deceleration rib 534 .

The deceleration rib 534 serves to reduce the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534 a projecting forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front projections 534 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520 . In this embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Also, five front projections 534b are provided. The plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged along the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the first guideway 531 with appropriate spacing therebetween. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (not facing each other in the front-rear direction, but shifted in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guideway 531, the game ball (moved by the first guideway 531) collides with the rear protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b, and moves in a zigzag shape in plan view. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed is reduced.

By reducing the moving speed of the game ball moved along the first guide path 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 . Thus, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guideway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guideway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. , and can be made to win a prize in the big prize opening 540.例文帳に追加That is, it is possible to quickly digest the rounds in the jackpot game. Also, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls stay on the shutter 610, many prizes can be won. In addition, since many game balls can be won at once, winning more than the number of possible wins in one round of the jackpot game (so-called over-winning) is likely to occur.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric role space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from right to left while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531 . In this way, the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 are configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guideway 532 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from right to left (first guideway 531 side).

The third guideway 533 is arranged substantially in the center of the special electric role space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531 . The third guideway 533 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531 . A wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532 . Thus, the third guiding path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guiding path 533 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (towards the big winning opening 540). The third guiding path 533 has a guide portion 535 .

The guide part 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 533 . The guide portion 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide part 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

42, 43, 45 and 46 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowest portion of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The big winning opening 540 has a count switch 541 . As shown in FIG. 42 , the count switch 541 is arranged behind and below the big winning opening 540 .

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 38, 40 to 42, 46, 48 and 49 includes various members (shutter 610, grand prize opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 48, the rear case 550 is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, the shutter 610, the link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. In addition, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511. As shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessories]
The configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 65. FIG.

In addition, the special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state (open state) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the large prize-winning port 540 and a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the large-prize winning port 540. However, unless otherwise specified, the arrangement and configuration of various members will be described below assuming that they are in a closed state.

The special electric accessory 6000 comprises a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005, as shown in FIGS.

A housing portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 50 to 53 is a member that houses various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The housing portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an upper side and a front side opened. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 38, etc.) via screws or the like. The housing portion 6001 has a communication opening 6011 , a support shaft 6012 , a boss portion 6013 and a guide opening 6014 .

The communication opening 6011 communicates between the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating section 6001 . A communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the accommodating portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013 to be described later from the rear to the right in plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically. The support shaft 6012 is formed to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed in the rear right portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011 .

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports a later-described restricting member 6005 . The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. Boss portion 6013 is formed to protrude upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in a plan view and in front of the communication opening 6011 to the left. 50 to 52 and other appropriate drawings, the boss portion 6013 is shown in a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005. As shown in FIG.

Guidance opening 6014 is for inserting guide shaft 6056 of regulation member 6005, which will be described later. More specifically, it defines the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005, as will be described later. The guiding opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to pass through the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view that is bent in the middle from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. More specifically, the guide opening 6014 comprises a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017, as shown in FIG. 53(a).

The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013 . The length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the connection opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend arcuately in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a portion of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed-dotted arrow in FIG. 53(a)). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013 so as to extend along the outline of the boss portion 6013 in plan view. The rear end of the second guide opening 6017 is connected with the left end of the first guide opening 6016 . A front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward of the center P of the boss portion 6013 in the front-rear direction.

A shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 is a member (a member for switching between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by power from a large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later. The structure of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 46 and 47(c), etc.). The shutter 6002 has an elongated plate portion 6021 , a connecting plate portion 6022 and a connecting shaft 6023 .

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guiding path 531 (see FIG. 46 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed such that its longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view, and is slanted to the left in a front view (the upper surface faces the upper left).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023 to be described later. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed to extend rearward from the central portion of the elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed near the rear end of the connecting plate portion 6022 .

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 46, etc.) from behind, and the connection plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. Housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001 .

A large winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 51, 52 and 54 is a member for driving the shutter 6002 . The big winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing portion 6031 , a power generation portion 6032 , a plunger 6033 , a power transmission portion 6034 and a spring 6035 .

The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is a member that accommodates various members that constitute the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The solenoid housing portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below.

The power generator 6032 is a member that generates power for the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The power generator 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, and the like (not shown). The power generator 6032 can attract a plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to energization from a predetermined power supply. The power generating portion 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generating portion 6032 is accommodated inside (left portion) of the solenoid accommodating portion 6031 with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction.

The plunger 6033 is a substantially bar-shaped member (movable iron core). The plunger 6033 is arranged with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generating portion 6032 . The plunger 6033 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 .

The power transmission section 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission portion 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission portion 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid housing portion 6031 and attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033 . The power transmission part 6034 has a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037 .

The connection opening 6036 is to be connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission portion 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed so as to pass through the power transmission portion 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected with a regulating member 6005 which will be described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other in the left and right directions. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-like portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission part 6034 . In addition, below, the connection protrusion part 6037 shall point out the said gap.

Spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035, through which the plunger 6033 is inserted, is arranged between the power generation portion 6032 and the power transmission portion 6034 in a constantly compressed state. In this way, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission section 6034).

In the big prize winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, the plunger 6033 moves rightward by the biasing force of the spring 6035 when the power generating section 6032 is not energized. On the other hand, when the power generating portion 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves leftward against the biasing force of the spring 6035 due to the attractive force of the power generating portion 6032 . In this way, in the big winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on and off the power generation section 6032, the plunger 6033 can reciprocate in the horizontal direction with respect to the power generation section 6032 to generate power.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a prize to the big prize mouth 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to move the game ball to the large winning opening 540. Winning becomes easy (open state).

A link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 and 55 interlocks (interlocks) the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002, and transmits power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view by a portion (first link extension portion 6041) extending substantially in the left-right direction and a portion (second link extension portion 6042) extending substantially in the front-rear direction. be done. The link arm 6004 has a central tubular portion 6043 , a connecting opening 6044 , a connecting shaft 6045 and a restricting protrusion 6046 .

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 . The center tubular portion 6043 is formed substantially in the center of the link arm 6004 (connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6043 in plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is through which the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted. A connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (tip) end of the first link extension 6041 . The connecting opening 6044 is formed to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending linearly from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the lateral direction in plan view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 .

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected with the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (tip) end of the second link extending portion 6042 . The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (horizontal length) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 .

The restricting protrusion 6046 abuts on a restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape protruding downward. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end of the first link extension 6041 and on the front left side of the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view. A rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

A regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 and 56 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central tubular portion 6053 , a regulating block portion 6054 , a connecting shaft 6055 and a guiding shaft 6056 .

The central cylindrical portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . The central tubular portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. In addition, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

A plate-like portion (first restricting extension portion 6051 ) extending so as to spread in plan view is formed on the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053 . In addition, a plate-like portion (second restricting extension portion 6052) is formed on the left side of the central cylindrical portion 6053 so as to spread out in plan view. In this way, the central tubular portion 6053, the first restricting extension portion 6051, and the second restricting extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shaped mutual positional relationship in plan view. Note that when the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053, the restricting member 6005 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulating block portion 6054 abuts on the regulating projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion that protrudes upward. The regulating block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulating extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. A front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first restricting extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. Thus, the axial center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the axial center of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 . The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Guide shaft 6056 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second restricting extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) in the lateral direction in plan view.

Below, using FIGS. 50 to 52 and FIGS. 57 to 61, the assembly structure of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. do.

60 and subsequent drawings, the accommodating portion 6001 is indicated by broken lines, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening portion 6014 are indicated by solid lines for convenience of explanation. 60 and subsequent drawings, the link arm 6004 is indicated by a broken line, but the restricting protrusion 6046 is indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 61, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

First, an outline of the assembly structure of various members (the shutter 6002, the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005) to the housing portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001 . Thus, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 .

Also, the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below. Thus, the upper side and the lower side of the housing portion 6001 (the power transmission portion 6034 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated through the communication opening portion 6011.

In addition, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. Thus, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported in the housing portion 6001 about the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 in a plan view clockwise or counterclockwise.

In addition, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. In this way, the restricting member 6005 is supported by the accommodating portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Next, the details of the assembly structure of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 extends downwardly of the housing portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. and is protruded. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001 . In this way, the link arm 6004 and the big winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to contact the left edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003. As shown in FIG. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 and the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 .

Further, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted through the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlockably connected via the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 .

Also, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 , the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 contacts the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 .

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the rear side surface of the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. surface contact).

Further, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. It is positioned to abut the left edge of portion 6053 .

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 protrudes downward from the accommodating portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037 .

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted through the guiding opening portion 6014 of the housing portion 6001 from above.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 can 6016 (more specifically, abutting the right end of the first guide opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left side edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is aligned with the first guide opening 6016. is in contact with the right end of the

61 and 65, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 (in more detail describes in detail the regulation of unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002).

In this embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 does not mean opening according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force applied directly to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball hitting the shutter 6002). collision of the shutter 6002, or tampering with the shutter 6002 by an illicit person).

In the following description, the direction of rotation of each member is based on the plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a "locked state."

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide backward) is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 , a force is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 to rotate it clockwise.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is located behind the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 (that is, in the movement direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 , the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise to the restriction member 6005 via the restriction projection 6046 and the restriction block 6054 . A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 and the guide shaft 6056). abutting). That is, the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter referred to as the front edge) is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(a), even if a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is first Since it interferes with the front edge of the guiding opening 6016, the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate.

As described above, since the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting force to the link arm 6004 cannot move either. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guiding opening 6016, the shutter 6002 is moved as intended by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001. Unintended opening (more specifically, unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

When the link arm 6004 transmits a counterclockwise rotating force to the restricting member 6005 in the locked state, the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 are separated. The front side surfaces press each other with a relatively strong force. However, the rear side surface of the restricting projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are in surface contact, not point contact, as described above. can be made

A configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is closed will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where the external force is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the regulation member 6005 and the housing portion 6001 The locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

When the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is to be opened, the power generating section 6032 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. is done. When the power generating section 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward as shown in FIGS. Further, when the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward, the power transmission part 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting projection 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves leftward.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 between the connecting protrusion 6037 and the regulating member 6005. . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward. Thus, when power is transmitted from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 , the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 .

Specifically, the central tubular portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 , and the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 comes into contact with the boss portion 6013 . In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001, and moves toward the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). part).

In the following description, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 abuts against the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening of the housing portion 6001). 6016) is referred to as "first movement of the power transmission portion 6034". Also, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). ) is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission portion 6034".

Further, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmitting section 6034 moves leftward by the first movement of the power transmitting section 6034, the connecting opening 6036 moves leftward with respect to the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 . In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 contacts the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all They are set to be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned inside the first guide opening 6016, and forward of the guide shaft 6056 (the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The forward edge of the first guide opening 6016 is located in the direction of movement when moving). That is, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, even if a force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 to rotate it counterclockwise, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the regulation member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. In other words, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission section 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the restricting member 6005 moves leftward, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the attitude when the shutter 6002 is closed. Become.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, when the power transmission section 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission section 6034 Power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulation member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005 and the control member 6037 . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward.

Here, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 . That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move leftward with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . Therefore, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) of the housing portion 6001. are in contact. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to partially overlap with a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 . That is, in front of the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (moving direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), an opening is formed along the locus along which the guiding shaft 6056 moves ( There is nothing to interfere when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the state shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 and moves forward through the second guide opening 6017 . Note that when the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. continue.

Note that the restricting member 6005 changes the position of the center of rotation in the horizontal direction between when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement and when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodation portion 6001 that contacts the left edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. and Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that contacts the right side edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned as the center of rotation.

In this way, by varying the position of the center of rotation of the regulating member 6005, the front side of the first guide opening 6016 is moved forward of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It toggles whether there is an edge or the second guide opening 6017 extends.

Thus, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the locked state of the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening portion 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is released, and the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is accommodated. The second guide opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward, thereby rotating the regulating member 6005 counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Also, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . That is, power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 pushes the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is in the first movement (locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, when the link arm 6004 and the restricting protrusion 6046 When a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the first guide opening. The restricting member 6005 could not rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the portion 6016 .

However, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 can move forward through the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 as described above. The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 is also moved rearward. Note that when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves rearward, it moves away from the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 .

Therefore, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, if the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 do not interfere with That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 rearward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts to slide backward.

The second movement of the power transmission portion 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after de-energization of the big winning opening solenoid 6003. Various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) operate in the reverse order.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displacement member that can be displaced between a position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass with respect to a passage area. is publicly known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

In the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. A solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between the open position and the closed position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided on the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging protrusion provided on the door member come into contact with each other to close the door. The opening of the door member can be restricted (locked) at the position.

However, since a certain degree of accuracy is required in the positional relationship between the locking portion and the engaging protrusion, if the solenoid deteriorates over time or foreign matter enters the solenoid drive path, etc. no longer come into contact with In this way, if the locking portion and the engaging protrusion do not come into complete contact with each other, the door member may rattle at the closing position, or the door member may be slightly opened (unintended displacement may occur). possibility), which was inconvenient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and is to more reliably restrict unintended displacement of a displacement member when the displacement member is displaced to a position where passage of a game ball is difficult. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 on which a game ball rolls, a second starting port 440 (passage area) provided in the game area 20 through which the game ball can pass,
A displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced to a position where the passage of the game ball is easy and a position where the passage of the game ball is difficult with respect to the second start port 440 (passage area),
A large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member;
A gaming machine comprising a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the big winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means),
The displacement member is in a state where the displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) controls the displacement member to be displaced to a position where the game ball can easily pass. is not performed, the displacement member can be locked at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass (regulation member 6005 and guidance opening 6014 of accommodation unit 6001),
The big winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) includes a power generation section 6032 that generates power, and is in contact with at least a part of the displacement member, so that the power generated by the power generation section 6032 can be transmitted to the displacement member. a power transmission unit 6034,
The locking means includes a regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by contacting at least a part of the displacement member, and a guide opening 6014 (displacement guiding portion) that regulates the displacement path of the regulating portion. ), wherein the displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and a second guide opening 6017 different from the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). (Second displacement section), the displacement member is displaced between a position where the passage of the game ball is easy and a position where the passage of the game ball is difficult while at least a part of the displacement member is in contact with the power transmission unit 6034. The regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is controlled to be displaced along the guiding opening 6014 (displacement guiding portion) in accordance with the displacement of the power transmission portion 6034, and the locking means is controlled by the regulating member 6005. When the (restriction portion) is located in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is maintained, and the restriction member 6005 (regulation portion) is positioned at the second guide opening 6017. When positioned in the (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) can be locked only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned at the right end of the first guide opening 6016, for example. Instead, the locked state of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004 ) can be maintained while the guide shaft 6056 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 . That is, even if the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodation portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not arranged in a normal position), the locked state is maintained. can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) When positioned in one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is restricted and locked while the movement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is possible. When the state is maintained and the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is positioned in the second guide opening portion 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is adjusted to the position of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion). By positioning the member 6005 (regulating portion) in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated to release the locked state. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion), which is one member, can switch between maintenance and release of the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. Especially in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, it is useful to have such a configuration because the space for arranging parts is limited.

Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment,
The displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guide portion) that guides a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guide portion, and the power transmission portion 6034 includes the link arm It is in contact with 6004 (link part).

With such a configuration, the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link section) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section), so that the power transmission section 6034 does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of an object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and may be an ordinary electric accessory or the like. may

Also, when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the link arm 6004 . In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 abut against each other. can be released. That is, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 is about to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction member 6005 are separated from each other. interference with the restriction block portion 6054 (restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the contact state between the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 is maintained, and the link arm When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005, thereby assisting the rotation of the restricting member 6005. .

Also, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. For example, the guidance opening 6014 (displacement guidance section) is closed when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise while the power transmission section 6034 is in the first movement (locked state). In addition, it may be formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 . From the viewpoint of promoting smooth movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. FIG. 66 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 as seen obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The normal electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 within the game area 20 . The normal electric accessory unit 400 includes general winning ports 53, 54, 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 for detecting winning of game balls to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. And, a housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won the second start port 440 and the game ball received in the out port 450 and discharges it outside the pachinko game machine 1, and the front surfaces of the second start port 440 and the out port 450 and a normal electric accessory 460. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420 . The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view.

A wall 4452 that partitions the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the rear surface of the front cover 445 . This wall 4452, when the blade member 4620 is opened, the game ball that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 (game ball that wins the second start opening 440) is received in the out port 450, It has a function to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that a game ball that has won the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The housing member 443 is provided with openings 4434 and 4436 at portions corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. A game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and a game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. - 特許庁The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). In addition, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

[Configuration of normal electric accessories 460]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. FIG. FIG. 68 is an example of a diagram showing a normal electric accessory 460, a second starting switch 441, and a housing member 443. FIG. FIG. 69 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. FIG. 70 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 viewed obliquely from the upper right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610 , a blade member 4620 , a starter solenoid 4630 , and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the starter solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620 .

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodation member 443 and is attached to the rear side of the opening forming member 420 . The rear side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 elongated in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 . A bearing (not shown) is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 to rotatably support a pin 4648 to be described later.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the plane of the drawing. The rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, which will be described later. The rotating shaft 4622 has a notched portion that is supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotary shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, blade member 4620 is in a closed state when it is standing, and is in an open state when it rotates rightward about rotating shaft 4622 from the closed state.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side when viewed from the front). The plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) extending rightward in front view, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves leftward in front view (retraction direction).

As the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction, the power transmission mechanism 4640 converts the power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotary shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The power transmission mechanism 4640 includes a blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, a flange connecting member 4646 connected to the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and a blade connecting member 4642. and a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotary shaft 4622 to be supported. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates together with the rotating shaft 4622 around the rotating shaft 4622 as the center of rotation. In addition, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding to the rear side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotation shaft 4622 supported by a bearing 46424 .

The link member 4644 is a V-shaped member when viewed from the front, and a long hole 46442 is formed at the lower end when viewed from the front. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the long hole 46442 . A support shaft 46446 protruding rearward is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 in front view. An engagement shaft 46448 is formed below the support shaft 46446 so as to protrude toward the rear side. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports a pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the dogleg changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 . When the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange clamping portion 46462 , a connecting hole 46464 and an engaging groove 46466 . The flange clamping portion 46462 clamps the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 , and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the direction of extension and retraction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 extends and retracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to move inside the connecting hole 46464 . The engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 . Here, the engaging shaft 46448 has a teardrop shape with a pointed end in a cross section that traverses the longitudinal direction. The link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at this tip. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 elongated in the left-right direction on the rear side (the side of the base cover 4610). This guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610 .

[Description of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. FIG. 71 shows the state of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by a dashed line), and the normal state when the blade member 4620 is in transition from the closed state to the open state. FIG. 11 is an example of a rear view showing a mode of an electric accessory 460 (indicated by a solid line). FIG. 72 shows the aspect of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in transition (illustrated by the dashed line), and the aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). ) is a rear view showing the .

When the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 71 and 72)). As the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction, the flange 4634 (see Figures 66 and 67) moves in the retraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 between the flange clamping portions 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contracting direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 71 and 72) when viewed. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward inside the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646 . When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the long hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4644 rotates. The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

When the vane member 4620 moves from the open state to the closed state, the starter solenoid 4630 is de-energized so that the plunger 4632 moves in the extending direction, which is the opposite movement from the operation from the closed state to the open state. done by In order to smoothly engage the engagement shaft 46448 with the engagement groove 46466 during operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state, the portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 is obliquely downward right (diagonally downward left in FIGS. 71 and 72) when viewed from the front.

[Explanation of the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, referring to FIG. 73, functions of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 73 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is blocked from opening. and (B) are diagrams for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open. 73(A) and (B) omit illustration of the starting solenoid 4630. As shown in FIG.

When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 (both see FIG. 71, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 73(a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction (unless the starter solenoid 4630 is energized except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to open. Therefore, even if a force is applied from the outside to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction as described above, disengages the engagement shaft 46448 from the engagement groove 46466, and opens the blade member 4620 (Fig. 73(b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 forming the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 forming the engaging groove 46466, and the starting solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as an unauthorized opening prevention means.

[Configuration of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. FIG. 74 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 75 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 76 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 77 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 has a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decoration plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and an operation on the base plate 1010. A movable decoration 1040 configured, a driving motor 1050 as a driving source for operating the movable decoration 1040, a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the driving motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040, A force transmission member 1020 that transmits the power from the driving motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040 via these gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. , and a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 77) for detecting the position of the movable decorative body 1040 . The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 so as to be positioned forward of the upper back accessory 1100 . A first support shaft 1011 , a second support shaft 1012 , a third support shaft 1013 and a fourth support shaft 1014 are formed on the front side of the base plate 1010 to be connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020 . The base plate 1010 also has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of a first transmission member 1022 described later is positioned when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position, and a cutout portion 1016 formed so that the movable decoration 1040 is positioned at the origin position. A notch portion 1017 is formed at a position corresponding to a later-described coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower side end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040 when it is in the state. In this specification, the cutout portion 1016 and the cutout portion 1017 are referred to as a rear-side first cutout portion 1016 and a rear-side second cutout portion 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that supports a hollow boss 10662 formed in the center of the first gear 1062, which will be described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067, which will be described later. , and a hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068, which will be described later.

The decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side (not shown). The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion (on the front side corresponding to the rear-side first notch portion 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is positioned when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. and a cutout portion 1038 formed at a portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is positioned (a position on the front side corresponding to the second rear cutout portion 1017). In this specification, the cutout portion 1036 and the cutout portion 1038 are referred to as a front-side first cutout portion 1036 and a front-side second cutout portion 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor attachment member 1054 . Drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from motor output shaft 1052 .

Gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062 , a second gear 1064 , a third gear 1066 , a fourth gear 1067 and a position detection gear 1068 . Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have the function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. Detector gear 1068 has no such function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed in the center of the first gear 1062 . A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into this hollow shaft 10622 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052).

The fourth gear 1067 is formed with a boss 10672 on the front side at a predetermined distance from the center 10674 in the radial direction. A position detection piece 10682 is formed on the front side of the position detection gear 1068 at a predetermined distance from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067 . Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates by the same rotation angle in the opposite direction in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067 . In this way, the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected. In this embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member and a second transmission member 1026 to which power from 1022 is transmitted via rack 1024 .

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-like member, and has a bearing 10222 formed at the center in the radial direction. This bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010 . Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b, the first transmission member 1022 extends from the radially outer side to the inner side (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the left side 1022a when viewed from the front. A long hole 10224 is formed in the facing direction. A boss 10672 of a fourth gear 1067 penetrating through the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable inside the elongated hole 10224 . A bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b in front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 . This bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decoration 1040 . The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position. Further, the first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022 concerned.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and has a bearing 10262 at the left end in front view and a bearing 10262 at the right end in front view. A bearing 10264 is formed. Bearing 10262 pivotally supports fourth support shaft 1014 of base plate 1010 . The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decoration 1040 . The second transmission member 1026 also includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). This gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022 .

A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and has a gear 10244 on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) in front view, and a gear 10248 on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) in front view. is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228, and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits it to the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) when viewed from the front, and a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side (gear 10248 side) when viewed from the front. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242 , and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246 .

The coil spring 1070 biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. The coil spring 1070 has an upper end attached and fixed to the back surface of the base plate 1010 and a lower end attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040 . When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front-side second notch 1038 and the back-side second notch 1017 .

Photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be positioned in photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on base plate 1010 . The photosensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decoration 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. FIG. 78 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 80 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decoration 1040 has moved downward to the operation limit position. In addition, in FIGS. 78 to 80, the constituent members and the like of the force transmission member 1020 are indicated by dashed lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates, and when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1064 meshing with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1066 meshing with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 meshing with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the boss 10672 also rotates about the center 10674 in the circumferential direction and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015 . Since the boss 10672 is movably connected within the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) moves toward the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise about the first support shaft 1011 when viewed from the front, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right when viewed from the front. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the elongated hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the elongated hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 substantially horizontally. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 in front view, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the support shafts 1044 and 1046 are synchronously rotated around the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014, respectively. operate around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while maintaining a substantially horizontal state and drawing an arc clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the position detection gear 1068 meshing with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise about the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 when viewed from the front. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067 , but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066 . Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected.

When the driving motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decoration body 1040 maintains a substantially horizontal state and arcs counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the reverse movement of the above-described movement. It operates upward while drawing

In this manner, the movable decoration 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body presentation) is performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. It is based on the result of the hit check performed on the On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable object effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and is performed based on the result of the hit determination after the next time. It will prepare for the movable body production to be performed.

[Configuration of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. FIG. 81 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 82 is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 83 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 84 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 85 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). 86, (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). 87(A) is an example of a sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A).

Line AA shown in FIG. 82 is a vertical line passing through the center of bearing 11724 (described later) formed in extended portion 11741 (described later) of upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. Line BB is a line that vertically traverses the longitudinal portion of upper left arm 1172 .

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat plate made of metal, and has a shape of a substantially picture frame without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, and a left drive mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right driving mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 covering the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see it, and a right motor 1161, etc. A movable decorative body 1110 that can move up and down by a decorative cover 1140, a left driving mechanism 1150 and a right driving mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covering decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. A pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decoration 1120, operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable decoration 1110, and the pantograph mechanism 1170. A regulating member 1190, which is a member that regulates the operation and is attached to the approximate center of the base member 1180, and a static decoration 1196 that is a member with decoration on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Prepare.

The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the horizontal direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end of the central plate portion 1182. 1186.

A static decoration 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decoration that is decorated on the front and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular center plate 1188 is provided upward at the upper end of the center plate portion 1182 . A front surface of the central plate 1188 has a pair of left support shaft 11882 and right support shaft 11884 projecting forward.

A restricting member 1190 is attached to the front surface of the central plate 1188 below the left spindle 11882 and the right spindle 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating above a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined downward to the left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined downward to the right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured to allow attachment of a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is mounted. A left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 moves when the driven gear 1156 (to be described later) rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to allow attachment of a right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11662 formed in the driven gear 1166 moves when the driven gear 1166 (to be described later) rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 has a left motor 1151 , a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157 , a driven gear 1156 , a left arm member 1155 and a left transmission arm 1154 . Of these, the left arm member 1155 , the driven gear 1156 and the drive gear 1157 function as left drive transmission members that transmit power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154 . The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decoration 1110) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11544 formed at one (right) end of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed.

The left motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Left motor 1151 is attached to left motor mounting member 1152 . The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted is attached to the left vertical plate portion 1184 so that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the driving gear 1157 and passes through the hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. can be attached to Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151 .

Driven gear 1156 meshes with drive gear 1157 . Driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1157 rotates. The driven gear 1156 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1157 . As a result, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 also has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11564 is rotatably supported on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 .

The left arm member 1155 is a substantially inverted C-shaped member when viewed from the front (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. A left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the end (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156 .

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1157 , the driven gear 1156 and the left arm member 1155 . The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left) end and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11542 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The left transmission arm 1154 also has a left arm bearing 11548 rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155 . The hollow shaft 11544 rotates around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed, so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circularly move) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. Possibly pivoted. A coil spring 1153 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (leftward rotation direction) is externally inserted in the hollow shaft 11544 .

Right drive mechanism 1160 has right motor 1161 , right motor mounting member 1162 to which right motor 1161 is mounted, drive gear 1167 , driven gear 1166 , right arm member 1165 and right transmission arm 1164 . Of these, the right arm member 1165 , the driven gear 1166 and the drive gear 1167 function as right drive transmission members that transmit power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164 . The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the direction in which the movable decoration 1110 operates) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11644 formed at one (right) end of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the area where the right drive transmission member is installed.

The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Right motor 1161 is attached to right motor mounting member 1162 . A right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is attached to the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through a hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161 .

Driven gear 1166 meshes with drive gear 1167 . Driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1167 rotates. The driven gear 1166 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1167 . As a result, the torque of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. The driven gear 1166 also has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11664 is rotatably supported on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 .

The right arm member 1165 is a substantially C-shaped member when viewed from the front (substantially anti-C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. It has a right arm support shaft 11654 at the part (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). Right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported on support shaft 11662 of driven gear 1166 .

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1167 , the driven gear 1166 and the right arm member 1165 . The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 protruding forward at one (right) end and an elongated hole 11642 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11642 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The right transmission arm 1164 also has a right arm bearing 11648 rotatably supported on the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165 . A hollow shaft 11644 rotates around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the area where the right drive transmission member is installed so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circularly move) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. Possibly pivoted. In addition, a coil spring 1163 as an example of an elastic member that biases the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction) is fitted around the hollow shaft 11644 .

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and transmit power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 to the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member described above. is transmitted through

Pantograph mechanism 1170 has upper left arm 1172 , lower left arm 1174 , upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 . The pantograph mechanism 1170 has four arms, an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178, forming a substantially rhombus-shaped side, and deforming the shape of the substantially rhombus (upper left arm 1172). and the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178). The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of colorless and transparent resin. The left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As for the above-mentioned "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left The lower arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are of the same length. Shapes and squares are also envisioned. Also, among the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm have the same length). The arms 1176 may or may not have the same length, and furthermore, for example, one set of two pairs of arms facing each other may have the same length and the other set of arms may have the same length. may have different lengths. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. In addition, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) does not need to be parallel. It may be a form in which the facing arms change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state in accordance with the driving of , or a form in which the parallel state changes to the non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned "opposed arms are parallel", considering the structure in which the accessories (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) are driven, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism. Therefore, if the tilt directions of the opposing arms are in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even if each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessories (movable decoration 1110 and covering decoration 1120) can be moved (for example, from the origin position to the operation limit position). ), the length of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied.

The left upper arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11724 in the part. Bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by left support shaft 11882 .

The left lower arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11741 is formed that extends upward (upper left arm 1172 side). The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . A hollow shaft 11744 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 .

The left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742 . The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 82). Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Also, the hollow shaft 11744 passes through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11224 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 .

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11764 in the part. Bearing 11762 is rotatably supported on right support shaft 11884 .

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11781 is formed that extends upward (toward the lower right arm 1178 side). The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11781 at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right lower arm 1178 . A hollow shaft 11784 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the right lower arm 1178 .

Upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting bearing 11764 on support shaft 11782 . The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing 11764 and a support shaft 11782), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 . Also, the hollow shaft 11784 passes through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 .

In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged so that the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship in the front-rear direction between 1172 and left lower arm 1174 will be described.

The upper left arm 1172 has a frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) and a rearwardmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction (see FIGS. 86 and 87). The left lower arm 1174 has a frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) and a rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction (see FIGS. 86 and 87). Here, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is positioned rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the left lower arm 1174 is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction. It is located in front of the plane position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172). In other words, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are such that when a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is viewed, the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174 extends in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (a positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A left upper arm 1172 is configured to be positioned slightly rearward. Alternatively, however, the upper left arm 1172 may be positioned slightly forward of the lower left arm 1174 . That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is located rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The position B2 is located behind the foremost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left upper arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172. Alternatively, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The position of the rearmost surface in the longitudinal direction of the upper right upper arm 1176 is positioned rearwardly of the position of the rearmost surface in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1176 , and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the lower left arm 1174 . Rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the longitudinal direction and forward of the rearwardmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearwardmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the left lower arm). 1174 and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 . (Between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172) doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (of the upper left upper arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174, from the position of the most forward arm to the position of the most rearward arm) (thickness) can be reduced, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush with each other. Alternatively, the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush with each other. Furthermore, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 The foremost position in the front-rear direction and the foremost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You can

Note that the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship in the front-rear direction between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are arranged in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). , the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178 from the foremost position to the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced. When the pachinko machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is restricted. Objects can be arranged, and it is possible to execute a dynamic movable performance using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174. Therefore, at the origin position, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are separated from each other. It becomes a substantially horizontal state. Similarly, since the extended portion 11781 extends upward beyond the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. Further, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) can be increased by the extent that the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be made thicker, the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be increased and stability during operation can be improved. Furthermore, by increasing the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates in accordance with the operation of each of these arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to execute a more dynamic movable effect.

In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be formed. It is possible to perform a dynamic movable effect using a movable accessory and a dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest by the movable effect.

The movable ornamental body 1110 is decorated on its front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at substantially symmetrical positions. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can slide up and down together with the covering decorative body 1120 by the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160 . The movable ornament 1110 has a hole 11102 , a slot 11104 , a hole 11106 and slot 11108 , and a boss 1112 and boss 1114 . The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at substantially symmetrical positions, and are elongated elongated holes. The bosses 1112 and 1114 are provided on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110 at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. In addition, the movable decoration 1110 has an LED board 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, so that it can emit light as the game progresses. When the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1116 emit light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107 .

The covering decoration 1120 has a covering decoration 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration 1110 and a covering decoration 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration 1110 . The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224 . The covering decorative body 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244 .

The cover decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 rotatably supported in the hole 11102 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11224 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 . The cover ornament 1122 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11744 at the central end of the left lower arm 1174). As a result, the covering decoration 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

The cover decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 rotatably supported in the hole 11106 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11244 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 . The cover ornament 1124 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decoration 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other.

[Description of the operation of the upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92. FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before starting operation, that is, in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a state after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, (A). is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. 90A and 90B are diagrams showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. . In FIG. 91, after the upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164 move the decoration. When the body 1110 is actuated downward in the paper surface (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts to operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode. ) is the rear view. 92A and 92B are diagrams showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration body 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration body 1110, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the upper back accessory 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178 are all substantially horizontal). be. Here, the members (the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is actuated downward in the paper surface are the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110. The members that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of colorless and transparent members. As a result, the images displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are less likely to be obstructed, and the player is less likely to notice this.

As the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward in the plane of the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 move vertically. The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decoration 1110 is actuated downward in the plane of the paper, the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 face are vertical, but until the movable decoration 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, Left lower arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178 remain positioned on the back side of movable ornament 1110 .

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. As drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. When the support shaft 11562 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the plane of the paper, and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It circulates clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11564 (the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left, a clockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154 . When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves within the slot 11542 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. As drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 11662 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the paper surface, and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It circulates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward to the right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward to the right, a counterclockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. As shown in FIG. When a counterclockwise pressing force around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves within the slot 11642 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward along with the movement of the movable decoration 1110 . Since the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorations 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the long holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decoration 1110, when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, gravity This is because the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 are also moved downward by the action.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front in synchronism with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downwards.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in a front view to move the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 downward in the paper plane, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covered decorative body 1122 moves downward in the paper plane. pushed down towards As a result, the left lower arm 1174 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view to move the movable decoration 1110 and the covered decoration 1120 downward in the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covered decoration 1124 is pushed downward in the paper surface. be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11782, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884). Thus, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882 ), it will come into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884 ), it will come into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when in contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position directed downward in the paper plane, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when in contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the upper limit position in the paper plane. This is the operating limit position directed downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front after the left upper arm 1172 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decoration 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 moves toward the long hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable ornamental body 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 moves toward the elongated hole 11108. moves from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124 together with the movable decoration 1110 move downward in the paper from the origin position, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move downward in the paper. When the movable decoration 1110 is moved to the limit position and the movable decoration 1110 moves downward in the plane of the drawing, the covering decoration 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration 1110 . When the covering decoration 1120 moves relative to the movable decoration 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by the player. The amount of exposure of lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of covering decoration 1120 with respect to movable decoration 1110 increases.

Thus, the upper back accessory 1100 is vertically movable between the origin position (see FIG. 88) and the lower end position (see FIG. 90). Specifically, the movable decoration 1110 is movable between the origin position and the lower end position, and the covering decoration 1120 is moved between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. can be moved. After the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 have moved to the lower end position, the operation limit position is that the covering decoration 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110 while the movable decoration 1110 is at the lower end position. This is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is at the lower end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed even when the covered decorative body 1120 is at the operation limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the lower end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It will advance toward the front. Advancement of the upper back role 1100 forward from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 ) is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed under the condition of ).

It should be noted that when the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of transparent resin, it does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left The fulcrums with the lower arm 1174 are all on the sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which is less likely to hinder the player's visual recognition (the player tends to focus on the central portion). 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be provided compactly in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100 . Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are difficult to come into view of the player. In addition, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the overall thickness of the upper back accessory 1100 (in this embodiment, the thickness is about the same as the width of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). ing).

In addition, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 both start to operate from the origin position, and the covering decoration 1120 (covering decoration 1120) moves toward the movable decoration 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will begin to operate relative to each other. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the covering decoration 1120 does not operate with respect to the movable decoration 1110. Therefore, the covering decoration 1120 does not operate from the time when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate. Since it is difficult to predict the final form, the movable decoration 1110 will perform an operation that exceeds the player's expectations from the middle, making it possible to increase interest.

In this embodiment, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts to operate, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124) is not operated with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 at the beginning, and the movable decoration body 1110 is movable from the middle. The covering decoration 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decoration 1110, but is not limited to this, and the covering decoration 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decoration 1110. may be

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 respectively (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if this is done, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the right upper arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 do not move. The longitudinal portion of each arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 eventually become exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122) is attached to the movable decorative body 1110. and covering decorative body 1124) are operated relatively. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward in the plane of the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. And the lower right arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be visually recognized in a front view. The arm 1178 is positioned on the rear side of the covering decorative body 1120 . When the covered decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the role object area (area where the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized in the front view becomes large. As a result, even if the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 can be moved in a natural manner without discomfort for the player. Prevents exposure.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts to operate toward the lower end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each move to the left contact surface. 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1110 toward the lower end position, the covering decoration 1120 (the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration Body 1124) is actuated upward. Here, the operation of the covering decoration 1122 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Similarly, the movement of the covering decoration 1124 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, for both the covered decorative body 1122 and the covered decorative body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left motor 1151 for the covered decorative body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covered decorative body 1124) are rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decoration 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decoration 1100 while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1100 . Moreover, since only one motor is rotated for each of the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124, the structure is simple and space-saving, and the movable decoration 1100 can be operated while the movable decoration 1100 continues to operate. can be operated independently of the operation of In particular, in recent years, increasing the size of movable accessories and arranging a plurality of movable accessories has become mainstream, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performs the linear motion in the vertical direction. When driving mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the driving mechanism over at least the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and installation of such a driving mechanism requires a large area. If the accessory can be operated by arcuate motion, space can be saved, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by arcuate motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves inside the long hole 11542. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. In synchronism with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the long hole 11642 moves inside the long hole 11642. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, while each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is moved in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, the attitude of the movable decoration 1110 is maintained substantially horizontally. It is possible to move the movable decorative body 1110 substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operation range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 move in an arc, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanism (the left drive mechanism 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration 1110 is set to the movable decoration 1110. can be made smaller than the operating range of , and can greatly contribute to space saving.

In addition, in the present embodiment, similar decorations are provided on the front surfaces of the movable decoration 1110, the covering decoration 1120, the decoration cover 1130, the decoration cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decoration 1196. is applied. The same type of decoration means, for example, decoration that evokes the same idea, and if decorations that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, and shape are applied, they can evoke the same idea. In the present embodiment, on the front surfaces of the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196, there are formed the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100) having the same color in appearance. It is decorated with recognizable decorations. In addition, since the upper back accessory 1100 is a character shape related to the concept of the game machine, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196 having the same type of decoration applied to the front face are used to form the same character. A character form is formed.

In a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a driving member that drives the movable member (the left transmission of the present embodiment) arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164) may be visible when viewed from the front when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this regard, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional game machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in a front view, and other members (movable ornaments 1110 , covering decorative body 1120, decorative covers 1130, 1140 and static decorative body 1196) are members constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members (eg , see (A) of FIGS. 88-92). More specifically, the left transfer arm 1154 is decorated with a decoration that provides continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transfer arm 1164 is provided with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to give continuity between 1140 and 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same manner to form one character shape. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decoration 1110 to support the movable decoration 1110. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that it is a member that does. Furthermore, while the movable decoration 1110 has an eye-like shape, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 have shapes that give the image of the outer corner of the eye from the left and right ends of the movable decoration 1110. . Therefore, it is even more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decoration 1110 .

[Configuration of Lower Accessory 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 98. FIG. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 94 is an example of a back view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 95 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as seen from the front right diagonally above. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 97 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an auxiliary force that acts upward on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 that moves up and down. A lower accessory driving motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is used to move the lower accessory. A gear 1240 for transmission to the decorative body 1210 and a rear cover 1250 made of transparent resin arranged behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory driving motor 1230 described above function as an operating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to approximately the center of the lower part of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 on the front side. A support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed toward the front on the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed rearward on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 that are substantially symmetrical to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. formed. The hole 12204 is formed to draw an arc centering on the support shaft 12203 . The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc around the support shaft 12205 . A photosensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a horizontally elongated decorative member. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be vertically operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can move vertically with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. and a lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that covers the front surface of the lower accessory movable base 12102 and moves up and down. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102 . These elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are transversely long elongated holes. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the long hole 12106 .

In addition, the lower accessory movable base 12102 has an LED board on which an LED (not shown) is arranged as a light source on the front side. When the LED arranged on this LED board emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 .

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at attachment portions 12604 and 12606 . The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706 . The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 pivotally supported by the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at its left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at its right end to engage with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 .

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280 . Auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (to the left) with bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The counterclockwise biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 .

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207 .

A gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The gear 1240 includes a driving gear 12402 coaxially provided with the lower accessory driving motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and are horizontally rotated so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. arranged side by side. Also, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in directions opposite to each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in its center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. As shown in FIG. The teeth of left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in its center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. As shown in FIG. The teeth of right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this manner, the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface at a predetermined distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 in the radial direction. Similarly, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface of the right driven gear 12406 at a predetermined distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 in the radial direction. Note that the distance from the center of left driven gear 12404 to boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of right driven gear 12406 to boss 12407 .

In addition, "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height position of the left driven gear 12404 and the center height position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same", and "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same. However, when transmitting the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 to the lower accessory movable decoration 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is stabilized while maintaining the same posture in appearance (balanced in the left and right direction). In order to be able to move up and down, it is sufficient that the colleague is transmitted to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 substantially evenly.

The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, hole 12204 is formed corresponding to the locus along which boss 12405 revolves around support shaft 12203 when left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, the hole 12206 is formed so as to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12407 rotating around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

Bosses 12405 and 12407 are normally located at the lowest position (the position shown in FIG. 99).

Holes 12204 and 12206 also have the function of defining the movement ranges of bosses 12405 and 12407 (that is, the rotation ranges of left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost positions of the bosses 12405 and 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate are defined as the uppermost positions, the holes 12204 and 12206 are positioned at least at the lowermost and uppermost positions. and the bosses 12405 and 12407 must be formed so as to be able to move between them. In this embodiment, the holes 12404 are formed clockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 99) to beyond the highest position. Also, the hole 12206 is formed counterclockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 99) to a position beyond the highest position.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12405 . Further, of the two positions where the hole 12206 intersects with the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406, the upper position is the highest position of the boss 12407, and the lower position is the lowest position of the boss 12407 (either (see also FIG. 101). However, in FIG. 101, both boss 12405 and boss 12407 have moved slightly beyond the topmost position.

It should be noted that the “position slightly exceeding the uppermost position” of the boss 12405 means the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 in a front view (right side in FIG. 101A, FIG. 101A). (B)), which is a position where a substantially uppermost position can be maintained. Further, the “position exceeding the uppermost position” of the boss 12407 means the left side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side in FIG. 101A, the left side in FIG. 101B ) to the right). However, it is preferable that the extent of the "over position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has descended when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 will descend to a position lower than the uppermost position.

[Description of the operation of the lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99A and 99B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the operation limit, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. Note that FIG. 101 shows the boss 12407 and the long hole 12108 so that they can be understood.

The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is vertically movable between an origin position (see FIG. 99) and an operation limit position (see FIG. 101). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the operation limit position, it is positioned in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is directed forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. will advance. The advancement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405 located at the bottom in the normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc with a radius of the straight line distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. rotate to When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 located at the lowest position in the normal state is reversed while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves from the origin position (see FIG. 99) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward ( 99(B) and 100(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed up while moving to the right. The boss 12407 moves rightward (to the left in FIGS. 99(B) and 100(B)) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower role object movable base 12102 while moving the lower role object movable base 12102 upward. push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves that guide the operation of the bosses 12405 and 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operation ranges of the bosses 12405 and 12407 (the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotation range).

In addition, while the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 101), the boss 12405 moves through the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 100(B) and 101(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 moves into the long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving leftward (rightward in FIGS. 100(B) and 101(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. In addition, since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise biasing force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 pushes the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

As the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 . That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 101) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 100(B) and 101(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 moves through the long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving rightward (leftward in FIGS. 100(B) and 101(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward. Also, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moving from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the origin position (see FIG. 99), the boss 12405 moves through the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 to the right. While moving in the direction (leftward in FIGS. 99(B) and 100(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inserted into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. to the left (to the right in FIGS. 99(B) and 100(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward.

As described above, the height direction position of the center of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the center of rotation of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. diameter is the same. Also, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the LED board is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory elongated in the left-right direction. When raising such a role object, there is a possibility that power will be transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be raised is somewhat heavy or the accessory is long in the left-right direction, the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 alone can lift the object. While maintaining the posture at the origin position (see FIG. 99), the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stably (balanced in the left and right direction) without transmitting power to either the left or right side. It becomes possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is required to operate the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so that the motor rotates more than the maximum number of rotations (to rotate beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which is activated by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically moves as the boss 12405 collides with the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 101A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side of the vertical line LR in FIG. 101A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 101A), and the center of the right driven gear 12406 is positioned. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through OR (on the left side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 101A).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position that slightly exceeds the topmost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position that slightly exceeds the topmost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) acts on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210. , the holes 12204 and 12206 restrict the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 . Therefore, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in either direction, and left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 are locked from rotation at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend due to gravity. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend, and is held at the operation limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction (clockwise) toward the origin position. As a result, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, It is possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

The boss 12405 must be on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406). , downward movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the direction of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, when boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) is to be held at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The moving range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position to hold the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the right side of the vertical line LL (the right side in FIG. 101(A) and the left side in FIG. 101(B)). , the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the left side of the vertical line LR (left side in FIG. 101(A), right side in FIG. 101(B)). The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost end position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by rotating the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406, the bosses 12405 and 12407 are rotated to rotate the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) is moved up and down, but the mode of moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down is not necessarily limited to this, and a force acting member (in this embodiment, The bosses 12405 and 12407 correspond to the form) may move in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) to move the force applying member, for example, the above-described A rotating member or the like having a force acting member formed thereon may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved along an arc of a perfect circle by using a gear, but they are not necessarily moved along an arc of a perfect circle. It is not necessary, and may be moved along an arc of an ellipse. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment (more specifically, lower accessory movable The component force of the load on the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force applying member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 in this embodiment). Therefore, as long as the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower role product driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target role product descends, a simple configuration can be obtained without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Then, the target role product can be locked upward in a series of operations for moving the target role product upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (the movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. 12204 and 12206 are physically stopped. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped above by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of this embodiment), the stop There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the desired upper position, and there is a risk that the rising speed of the target accessory near the upper position will decrease. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated by physically restricting the movement of the force applying members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target role can be moved. , high-speed movement can be achieved with a simple configuration without stalling in the vicinity of the upper position to be stopped. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical object has a horizontally elongated shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the stability in the horizontal direction can be maintained. Can lift objects.

Further, in this embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in directions opposite to each other. That is, the bosses 12405 and 12407 move synchronously in opposite directions. As a result, even if an external force (such as vibration) is applied in either the left or right direction to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102), the lower accessory driving motor As long as 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the top end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the bosses 12405 and 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner Accessory 1300]
Corner feature 1300 comprises upper corner feature 1320 and lower corner feature 1350 as described above. Here, the upper corner component 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner component 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner component 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described.

[Configuration of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105. FIG. FIG. 102 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 103 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 105 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 that are operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. and a photosensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 .

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally elongated plate-like member attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above on the back side of the upper front role 1000 and the front side of the upper back role 1100 . Support shafts 13222 , 13224 and 13226 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1322 . A hole 13225 is formed between the support shafts 13222 and 13224 in the horizontal direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224 . A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in substantially the upper half of the periphery of the support shaft 13226 .

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302 . A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13304 . A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. First movable body 1330 is rotatable around bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). A long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330 . This slope 13307 has a mountain shape that rises from both longitudinal sides toward the center.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402 . A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13404 . A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 when viewed from the front. Second movable body 1340 is rotatable around bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340 . This slope 13407 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331 . Also, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322 .

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334 , a second gear 1335 , a third gear 1336 , a first transmission arm 1337 and a second transmission arm 1338 . The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are in mesh, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are in mesh. Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via gears 1334 and 1335 . Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via respective gears 1334-1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334 . The hollow shaft 13342 is supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so as to be coaxial with the motor output shaft 13322 and rotate therewith. A hollow shaft 13342 pivoted on the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225 .

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335 . The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224 . A boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336 . The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13226 . A boss 13364 is formed on the front side of the third gear 1336 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. A boss 13366 is formed on the rear side of the third gear 1336 at a position radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. This boss 13366 moves within the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. Bosses 13364 and 13366 are formed on surfaces opposite to each other and substantially diagonally with respect to the center of third gear 1336 . The third gear 1336 has a detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photosensor 1345 formed on the front surface.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a bar portion 13371 . A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13371 side. Bearing 13372 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13308 . A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. Bearing 13374 is rotatably supported on boss 13354 .

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a bar portion 13381 . A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13381 side. Bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13408 . A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. Bearing 13384 is rotatably supported on boss 13364 .

The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 106 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Description of the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 109. FIG. FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 107 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 108 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further actuated from the position shown in FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 109 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is positioned at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. located in At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 36), so they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 106), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 106 to 109). , the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) when viewed from the front, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 104) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) when viewed from the front. circulate to When the boss 13354 rotates around the hollow shaft 13352 clockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 when viewed from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 106 to 109) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves leftward in a front view, the support shaft 13308 moves to the fixed plate 1322. The support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) thus formed is the center of rotation and rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise in a front view with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation. forward).

Further, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation in a front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the hollow shaft 13362 (the support shaft 13226) as the center of rotation. rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates about the support shaft 13226 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 104) rotates about the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13364 rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13362 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 106 to 109) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably fitted around the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves rightward in front view, the support shaft 13408 moves toward the fixed plate 1322. When viewed from the front, it rotates clockwise around the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) from the origin position with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be synchronously operated by the rotation of one motor 1332 .

Also, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 interferes with the fixed plate 1322, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby allowing the first movable body 1330 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby smoothly moving the second movable body 1340 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Configuration of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. FIG. 110 is an example of a front view of a lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 111 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the back left.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a driving source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. and a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

The fixing plate 1352 is a laterally elongated plate-like member fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800 on the rear side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 . Support shafts 13522 , 13523 , 13524 , 13525 , 13526 , 13527 , 13528 , and 13529 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1352 . A hole 13530 is formed around the support shaft 13527 in substantially the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 .

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552 . An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back of the arm 13554 . A hole 135592 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13559 . A bearing 13556 that supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13554 . A support shaft 13558 is formed on the lower right side of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable around a support shaft 13524 on which a bearing 13556 is supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559 . The coil spring 1395 urges clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise biasing force around the pivot 13524 acts on the third movable body 1355 . Furthermore, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355 . This slope 13557 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 13572 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13572 . An arm cover 13579 is provided on the rear surface of the arm portion 13574 . A hole 135792 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13579 . A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13574 . A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable around a support shaft 13529 on which a bearing 13576 is supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579 . This coil spring 1396 urges counterclockwise around the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise biasing force around the support shaft 13529 acts on the fourth movable body 1357 . Furthermore, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357 . This slope 13577 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

Motor 1354 is fixedly attached to fixed plate 1352 via motor mounting member 1356 . The power of motor 1354 is output from motor output shaft 13542 .

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to a third movable body 1355, and gears 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366 , 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361 . A motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so as to be coaxial with the motor output shaft 13542 and rotate together.

Power from motor 1354 is transmitted to first gear 1361, second gear 1362, third gear 1363, fourth gear 1364, fifth gear 1365, sixth gear 1366, and seventh gear 1367 in this order. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at its center, and a boss 13664 formed at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, the sixth gear 1366 has a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photosensor 1375 formed on the front surface at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. The seventh gear 1367 has a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528, and a boss 13674 that is radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a bar portion 13704 . A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355 . A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. Bearing 13708 rotatably supports boss 13664 of sixth gear 1366 .

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a bar portion 13724 . A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13724 side. Bearing 13726 rotatably supports support shaft 13578 . A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. Bearing 13728 rotatably supports boss 13674 .

The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 114 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116. FIG. FIG. 114 is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 115 is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 116 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is positioned at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 114), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116). , the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116) about the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the rotation center, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 112) rotates about the hollow shaft 13662. As viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 turns around the hollow shaft 13662 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 114 to 116) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355, when the bearing 13706 moves leftward in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. The support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 13524 when viewed from the front, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

In addition, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as a rotation center, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) in a front view. rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates around the support shaft 13528 clockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 112) rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13672 turns around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 114 to 116) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13578 moves toward the fixed plate 1352. When viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise around the formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation.

In this manner, rotation of one motor 1354 can synchronously operate the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 interferes with the fixing plate 1352, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1352, thereby allowing the third movable body 1355 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13577 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1352, thereby smoothly moving the fourth movable body 13570 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, the mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 117 shows the back unit when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position. 176 is an example of a front view. FIG. 118 shows the case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . FIG. 119 shows the case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . However, in FIGS. 117 to 119, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500 and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) is attached.

As shown in FIG. 117, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operating limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, one design (for example, an idiom) is formed by letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 form one design (eg, an idiom).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 form one design (eg, an idiom).

In this way, the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 104) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 113) are driven by the role product control circuit 207 (both of which are shown in FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201, for example. By controlling according to the result of , all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are combined into one design (hereinafter referred to as "first design" ), or part (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340) form one design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") or form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with some (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1357) It is possible to As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effects caused by the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of accessories.

Further, the design formed by two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, It is also possible to make the player recognize it as information suggesting the execution of a specific reach with a high degree of expectation. For example, when a specific ready-to-win effect that makes the player expect a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination by the start winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440, the specific In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1355) Any two or more movable bodies among the movable bodies 1357) may be represented by a design (for example, an idiom) that can be recognized when they are arranged close to each other.

In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. In other words, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Here, characters are applied to the front faces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively. Each single character applied to each of 1357 does not make any sense, and information related to the progress of the game is not presented to the player.

In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively located on the upper left in the front view and in the front. They are arranged at the upper right, lower left, and lower right positions when viewed from the front, which are separated from each other. Therefore, two or more movable bodies out of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's visual field in a front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, an idiom) formed by the letters attached to the two or more movable bodies that operate, and the liquid crystal display It is only perceptible when stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16 .

In this way, two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move inward from the outside of the field of view in a front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the depth (performance image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (movable characters advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thus, conventionally, information relating to the progress of a game, for example, has been presented to the player by, for example, effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 can be displayed without relying on the produced image. Only with the movable body, it is possible to show the player information relating to the progress of the game. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the performance be changed, but also the performance that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operation limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by the characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but it is not necessarily limited to this. There is no problem even if one design is formed only by characters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, only the letters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355 form one design. In this case, the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) do not form a design and simply exist as separate movable bodies.

Also, in the present embodiment, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is labeled with a letter, but this is not necessarily the case. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

In addition, in the present embodiment, characters are attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. Anything that forms a design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, something that evokes a particular idea) in front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 3, for example), , and other movable bodies, but not limited to this, all or part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are synchronously operated by the rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 104), and the third movable body is operated by the rotation of one motor 1354. Although the movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate synchronously, the present invention is not limited to this. Each body 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Structure of Side Accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. FIG. 120 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 121 is an example of a back view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 122 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 123 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view). In FIG. 121, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible, but they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450. A side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, a movable piece 1430 and an L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decoration 1450, and the positions of the movable decoration 1450 and a photosensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the front side of the mounting plate 1410 . At the bottom of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decoration support shaft 1414 for supporting the movable decoration 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is composed of a vertically elongated handle-shaped main body portion 1452 decorated on the front surface, and a single movable body configured to be operable together with the main body portion 1452 and also independently operable with respect to the main body portion 1452. 1454. A main body portion 1452 of the movable decoration 1450 has a movable decoration bearing 1458 that supports the movable decoration support shaft 1414 in the lower portion of the main body portion 1452 . The movable decoration 1450 is supported by the movable decoration bearing 1458 on the movable decoration spindle 1414, and is rotatable around the movable decoration spindle 1414 (movable decoration bearing 1458). The movable decoration 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 projecting rearward on the right side in front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444 . The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1442 .

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442 and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420 . The movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and long downward. and The link member 1420 is rotatable around a link support shaft 1412 supported by a link bearing 1422 . The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece long hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable piece elongated hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 . The second link 1425 is formed with a movable decoration long hole 1426 to which the movable decoration boss 1455 of the movable decoration 1450 is slidably connected. The movable ornamental boss 1455 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable ornamental elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 .

The photosensor 1464 is fixedly attached to the lower portion of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460 . A photosensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decoration 1450 . As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable decoration 1450 has the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end thereof, and the photo sensor 1464 detects the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position. A piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the side role item 1400]
Next, the operation of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120, 121 and 124 to 128. FIG. FIG. 124 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 125 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving forward in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 126 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 127 is a back view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 128 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as "most advanced position".

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 121). The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 (see FIG. 127) when viewed from the back. In the present embodiment, the speed reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates once (movable decoration 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the speed reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 127, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the elongated hole 1426 for movable decorative body. This is because the direction of rotation about the movable ornament support shaft 1414 (movable ornament 1450) is different from the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 1426 for the movable ornament. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is regulated by the side surface (surface in the longitudinal direction).

When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When rotating (counterclockwise in FIGS. 120, 124 and 126 and clockwise in FIGS. 121, 125, 127 and 128), the movable piece 1430 rotates about the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 124 and counterclockwise in FIG. 125) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is generated via the movable decorative boss 1455 . works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 127) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

The side accessory motor 1440 further rotates from the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 127), and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIGS. 120 and 124). and counterclockwise in FIG. 126, and clockwise in FIGS. rotate to When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 124 and counterclockwise in FIG. 125) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force is applied to the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455 to return the movable decorative body 1450 to the original position. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 121) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body can be moved by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (in the present embodiment, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 forward or reverse. 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 121) to approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 127), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1:00 in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be achieved by simply moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view to approximately 4:30 in the rear view. Movement of the movable ornament 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from approximately 4:30 to 1:00 in rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also as long as the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 does not fluctuate greatly, the distance from the origin position to the most advanced position The movement of the movable decoration 1450 is relatively quick, and the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is relatively slow. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position toward the most advanced position (movable body effect) is the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. Although it is performed based on the results, it is required that the movement of the movable decoration 1450 be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require rapid movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, it is possible to reciprocate the movable decoration 1450 between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (same direction). The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is greater than the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It is possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in conjunction with the main body part 1452, the action rendering of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting at the origin position, the most advanced position, or between the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independently movable body 1454 is attached to the main body part 1452. You can make it work.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. FIG. FIG. 129 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 130 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 131 is (A) an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are attached, an LED board 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner A lens 1583 , a decorative sheet 1584 , a half mirror 1585 , a window frame 1586 having the opening window 1552 described above, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-like member fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above.

The LED board 1560 is a plate-like member having a planar region 1563 and an annular projection 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above. On the LED substrate 1560 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged radially inside an annular protrusion 1561 , and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in a planar region 1563 . The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light radially outward. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

Light guiding lens 1570 is provided to accommodate LED substrate 1560 between panel mounting case 1556 and panel mounting case 1556 . The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting light in a plane. A hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 is formed in the light guiding lens 1570 .

Black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of panel cover 1590 . The black sheet 1580 has a black front side and watermarks such as characters on the back side. The watermark is not visible from the front in normal times (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears to float on the panel cover 1590 when a predetermined condition is met and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light. Black sheet 1580 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to opening window 1552 .

The half mirror 1585 , decorative sheet 1584 and inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged to face the opening window 1552 . At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated radially inward (positioned radially outward of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 131(B)) that protrudes toward the rear side in a front view along the outer periphery. Part of the light emitted radially outward from the LED 1562 is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 , and the light not absorbed passes through the inner lens 1583 . Also, the inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 130). Further, each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of cutouts formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the periphery toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583 . When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction. It is possible to achieve more uniform surface emission.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmissive sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn. The character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 cannot be seen from the front by the half mirror 1585 normally (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 can be seen in the area inside the opening window 1552. appear to float.

The window rim 1586 is bright plated and configured to reflect light. In addition, the above-described opening window 1552 is formed in the window frame 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain a beautiful appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and as described above, the black sheet 1580 is attached to the rear side. Also, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552 .

The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted radially outward. Part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 (see FIG. 131) of the inner lens 1583, part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and passes through the inner lens 1583. Light is emitted toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted radially outward is reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 131) of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 . The light reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 is incident on the inner lens 1583 after changing the traveling direction of the light to the radially inner direction. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since the light including the part of the light described above is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to emit light.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pachislot machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of hit/lose determination is displayed, a movable body presentation is performed to activate the movable body in order to make the player expect that the result of hit/lose determination is advantageous to the player. There are things that make it possible to raise

As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph, and the movable body is tilted at the same time when the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). ).

However, in the game machine described in, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-229582, when the operation of the movable body is started, multiple operations of the movable body, such as movement and tilting of the movable body, can be grasped. There is a limit to increasing the effect, and there is a possibility that interest will decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to enhance the presentation effect by the presentation of a movable body, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

(1) A game machine according to the present invention is a main movable member (for example, movable decoration 1110), a secondary movable member (for example, a covering decoration 1120) configured to be operable accompanying the operation of the main movable member when the main movable member is actuated, and one end of which is a predetermined An arm mechanism (e.g., pantograph mechanism 1170) attached to the base member (e.g., base member 1180) of and the other end attached to the secondary movable member (e.g., pantograph mechanism 1170), and the main movable member at the first position When the operation is started, the secondary movable member is also operated accordingly, and the arm mechanism is operated after the operation of the main movable member is started and before reaching the second position. and a regulating means (for example, a regulating member 1190) for regulating, wherein the secondary movable member is provided so as to be movable relative to the main movable member, and the regulating means prevents the operation of the arm mechanism. When constrained, the primary movable member operates to the second position, while the secondary movable member stage operates relative to the primary movable member.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the main movable member at the first position (for example, the origin position) starts to operate, the sub movable member also operates accordingly. However, the operation of the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is restricted before the main movable member reaches the second position, and the sub movable member operates relative to the main movable member. Therefore, when the main movable member and the auxiliary movable member start to operate, it can be difficult to grasp how these movable members operate. It is possible to improve interest by making people interested in.

(2) In the game machine described in (1) above, the arm mechanism (for example, pantograph mechanism 1170) includes a pair of first arms (for example, upper left arm 1172, upper right arm 1172) attached to the predetermined base member. 1176) and a pair of second arms (e.g., lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) with one end connected to the first arm and the other end attached to the secondary movable member. and when the operation of the main movable member and the auxiliary movable member that operates accompanying the main movable member is started, the pair of first arms and the pair of second arms form a substantially diamond shape. is.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the approximate rhombus shape is formed so as to avoid the central portion, which is easily visible to the player, the mechanism for operating the main movable member and the sub movable member is controlled by the player. It can be difficult to see.

As for the "substantially rhomboid shape", two pairs of opposing sides of the four sides (for example, the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178) are parallel. (e.g., upper left arm 1172 and lower right arm 1178 are parallel, lower left arm 1174 and upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and four sides of the same length, parallelograms and squares. It is also assumed that In addition, of the four sides, two pairs of opposing sides have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 have the same length). may not have the same length, and furthermore, one set of two sets of sides facing each other may have the same length and the other set may have different lengths. . That is, the lengths of the four sides are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. Also, considering that each side operates, it is not always necessary for the opposing sides to be parallel. It may be a form in which the opposite sides change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or a form in which the parallel state changes to the non-parallel state. Also, regarding the above "opposing sides are parallel", considering the structure when the accessory is driven, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism, so the inclination direction of the opposing sides is If they are oriented in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even if each of the four sides has a different length, considering that the accessory can move from the standby position (eg, origin position) to the drive position (eg, operation limit position) , the lengths of the four sides are varied.

(3) In the game machine described in (2) above, the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is directed from the first position (origin position) to the second position (for example, operation limit position). , the main movable member moves away from the predetermined base member (eg, base member 1180), and the arm mechanism (eg, pantograph mechanism 1170) moves toward the pair of second One arm (for example, upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176) is composed of a transparent member, and the pair of second arms (for example, lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) are configured to move the main movable member. It is configured to move along with the main movable member and to be positioned behind the main movable member.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) starts operating from the first position (origin position) toward the second position (operation limit position), the Since the main movable member moves away from a predetermined base member (for example, base member 1180), the arm mechanism (for example, pantograph mechanism 1170) is easily visible to the player. Therefore, a pair of first arms (for example, upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176) are made of a transparent member, and a pair of second arms (for example, lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) are mainly movable. To make it difficult for a player to visually recognize both a pair of first arms and a pair of second arms by arranging them to be moved in association with the movement of the members and positioned behind the main movable member. can be done.

(4) The game machine according to the present invention is a main movable member (e.g., a , movable ornament 1110), and a secondary movable member (e.g., covering ornament 1110) provided accompanying the main movable member and operably provided accompanying the main movable member when the main movable member is powered. 1120), power is applied to the main movable member in the first position, and both the main movable member and the sub movable member start operating toward the second position, and then the second movable member is moved to the second position. By restricting the operation of only the sub-movable member out of the main movable member and the sub-movable member until reaching the position, the main movable member can be moved from the first position to the second position. It is provided with restricting means (for example, restricting member 1190) that can change the operation of the movable member.

According to the game machine of (4) above, after both the main movable member and the sub-movable member start operating toward the second position, the main movable member and the sub-movable member reach the second position. By restricting the operation of only the secondary movable member, it is possible to vary the operation of the primary movable member from the first position to the second position. Therefore, when the main movable member and the sub movable member start to operate, it can be difficult to grasp how these movable members operate, and the movements of the movable members become interesting. can improve interest.

As described above, according to the invention described in Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by the movable body presentation and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of the win-lose judgment is displayed, an expectation effect is performed to make the player expect that the result of the win-lose judgment will be an advantageous result for the player, so that the effect of the win-lose judgment is enhanced. there is something

Examples of such an expectation effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a game machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique of vertically moving a movable body using a plurality of motors is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

However, moving the movable body vertically using a plurality of motors not only complicates the structure, but also requires synchronization of the plurality of motors. is also likely to become complicated.

In particular, since many game machines in recent years are provided with a large number of movable bodies to enhance the performance effect, there is a growing demand for a movable body performance with a simple configuration.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of performing a movable body presentation with a simple configuration.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a judging means for judging profit provision according to the establishment of a predetermined condition; Decorative cover 12104) and an operating mechanism capable of receiving power from a predetermined drive source (lower accessory drive motor 1230) and operating the movable member upward according to the determination result of the determination means. (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the operating mechanism operates the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward in the left-right direction. A pair of first gear (left driven gear 12404) and second gear (right driven gear 12406) having the same diameter are provided. It is characterized by having bosses (bosses 12405 and 12407) at distant parts and rotating synchronously with each other with the height direction position of the center of rotation being the same.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the movable member can be moved up and down with a single drive source, the movable member can be moved up and down with a simple configuration. The driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 can move the movable member upward in a well-balanced manner in the horizontal direction.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the first gear (left driven gear 12404) rotates, the first gear corresponding to the movement trajectory of the first boss (boss 12405) of the first gear (boss 12405) is rotated. and a second hole (hole 12206) corresponding to the locus of movement of the second boss of the second gear (right driven gear 12406) when the second gear (right driven gear 12406) rotates. and a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220), wherein the first boss can move in the first hole and the second boss can move in the second hole, The rotation ranges of the first gear and the second gear are restricted by the first hole and the second hole.

According to the game machine (2) above, the rotation of the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) by the first hole (hole 12204) and the second hole (hole 12206) is stabilized, and the movable member can be stably moved up and down while maintaining its posture.

In this way, according to the invention described in Appendix 2, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by the movable body presentation and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 2-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of the win-lose judgment is displayed, an expectation effect is performed to make the player expect that the result of the win-lose judgment will be an advantageous result for the player, so that the effect of the win-lose judgment is enhanced. there is something

Examples of such an expectation effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a game machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique of vertically moving a movable body using a plurality of motors is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

However, moving the movable body vertically using a plurality of motors not only complicates the structure, but also requires synchronization of the plurality of motors. is also likely to become complicated.

In recent years, game machines have tended to have larger movable bodies, and the challenge is how to move such large-sized movable bodies at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration. It's becoming

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of moving a movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention includes a vertically operable movable member (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210), a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined A force acting member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of receiving power from a driving source to actuate the movable member upward, and a movement restricting means for restricting movement of the force acting member (for example, , holes 12204 and 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220), and the force acting members are provided on the left and right sides and are synchronously movable first force acting members (for example, bosses 12405) and Having a second force acting member (for example, a boss 12407), the movement restricting means is such that even if the first force acting member and the second force acting member receive power from the predetermined drive source, It is characterized in that it is configured to restrict movement of the first force acting member and the second force acting member at a predetermined limit position.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the movable member (eg, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) can be moved up and down with one drive source (eg, the lower accessory drive motor 1230), it can be moved with a simple configuration. In addition to being able to move the member up and down, the first force acting members (eg, bosses 12405 and 12407) provided in the horizontal direction allow the movable member to move upward in a balanced manner in the horizontal direction.

Moreover, since the movement of the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is restricted by the movement restricting means, the movable accessory (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 ) High-speed movement can be achieved with a simple configuration without stalling the movable accessory at the upper position where it is desired to stop.

(2) In the amusement machine described in (1) above, the height direction position of the rotation center is the same and rotates in synchronization with each other, and a pair of substantially the same diameter first rotating members (for example, left driven gear 12404) and a second rotating member (e.g., right driven gear 12406), wherein said one force acting member (e.g., boss 12405) and said second force acting member (e.g., boss 12407) each: It is characterized in that it is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the first rotating member and the second rotating member by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the first force applying member (eg, boss 12405) is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the first rotating member (eg, left driven gear 12404) by a predetermined distance. Since the second force applying member (for example, boss 12407) is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the second rotating member (for example, right driven gear 12406), the first rotating member And the stable high-speed movement of the movable member can be achieved with a simple configuration that only rotates the second rotating member.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 2-2, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of moving the movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of the win-lose judgment is displayed, the movable body is moved upward in order to make the player expect that the result of the win-lose judgment will be advantageous to the player. There is a thing that performs and enhances the performance effect.

As such a movable body effect, for example, when the motor rotates, a projection of the rotating body rotates to the upper end, and a technique is known in which the arm is moved upward by receiving a pressing force from this projection. (For example, see JP-A-2014-76208).

However, in a game machine in which a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body is moved upward, in order to maintain the movable body that has moved upward, it is necessary to counteract the load of the movable body. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying a load to the motor, or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like for holding upward the movable body that has moved upward.

However, it is naturally not preferable to keep applying a load to the motor, and providing a new locking mechanism complicates not only the structure but also the control, which is not preferable. This is particularly noticeable when the movable body is held upward for a certain period of time or longer.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make it possible to hold a movable accessory that has moved upward with a simple configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable member (lower accessory decoration cover 12104) formed with long holes (long holes 12106, 12108) in the horizontal direction and capable of moving in the vertical direction, and operating the movable member. and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and The operating mechanism has bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) formed at a predetermined distance from the center in the radial direction, and receives power from the drive source. It is a rotatable gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and a hole through which the boss penetrates. ), holes (holes 12204 and 12206) are formed corresponding to the locus of movement of the boss from the lowest position to the highest position as the gear rotates counterclockwise. and a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) configured to allow the boss to move, and the boss passing through the hole of the base member extends through an elongated hole formed in the movable member (long hole 12106 , 12108), and when the gear rotates in the specific direction, the movable member moves upward while moving in the elongated hole, and the drive The source moves at least up to a vertical imaginary line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear when the gear is rotated in the specific direction to actuate the movable member upward. The gear is rotated as follows.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, gears (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right When the gear 12406) is rotated to operate the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward, the boss moves at least up to a vertical virtual line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear. the gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple structure without providing a new member as a lock mechanism. It is possible to maintain the movable member in The movable member is locked in this manner because when the boss is on a vertical imaginary line passing through the center of the gear (i.e., when the movable member is at its uppermost position), the gravitational force of the movable member acts vertically. However, this gravity component force does not act in the rotation direction of the gears (at the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 is leftward when viewed from the front, and the right driven gear 12406 is rightward when viewed from the front).

(2) The game machine according to the present invention has long holes (long holes 12106, 12108) formed in the horizontal direction, a movable member (lower accessory decoration cover 12104) that can move in the vertical direction, and the movable member. and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and The operating mechanism has bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) formed at a predetermined distance from the center in the radial direction, and receives power from the drive source. It is a rotatable gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and a hole through which the boss penetrates. and counterclockwise), holes (holes 12204, 12206 ) is formed, and has a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) in which the boss can move in the hole, and the boss penetrating the hole of the base member is the movable member 12106, 12108) formed in the slot, and moves in the slot as the gear rotates in the specific direction, moving the movable member upward When the drive source rotates the gear in the specific direction to move the movable member upward, the boss aligns with a vertical imaginary line passing through the center of the gear. The gear is rotated so as to move to a position exceeding (LL, LR).

According to the game machine (2) above, gears (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right When the gear 12406) is rotated to operate the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward, the boss moves to a position beyond the vertical imaginary line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear. the gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple structure without providing a new member as a lock mechanism. It is possible to maintain the movable member in The movable member is locked in this manner because the holes 12204 and 12206 formed in the base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) function as a lock mechanism.

(3) In the game machine described in (1) or (2) above, the gears include a first gear (left driven gear 12404) and a second gear ( 12406), and the first gear and the second gear receive power from the power source and synchronously rotate in directions opposite to each other The gear 12406 is characterized in that it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front to actuate the movable member upward.

According to the gaming machine (3) above, the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) are synchronized and rotated in opposite directions (the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front). , the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front), it is possible to stably move the movable member up and down while maintaining the posture of the movable member.

Thus, according to the invention described in Appendix 3, it is possible to hold the movable accessory that has moved upward with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of the win-lose judgment is displayed, an expectation effect is performed to make the player expect that the result of the win-lose judgment will be an advantageous result for the player, so that the effect of the win-lose judgment is enhanced. there is something

Examples of such an expectation effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a game machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique of moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

In recent years, the variation of production has been diversified. It is more preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body in the upper position.

However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when performing an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position after moving the movable body upward, the movable body is moved to the upper position. , it is necessary to continue applying a load to the motor that opposes the load of the movable body, or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like to hold the movable body in the upper position. Also, since some players shake the game machine, it is necessary to consider the possibility that an external force such as vibration acts on the movable body.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine which has a simple structure and can suitably hold a movable body in an upper position.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention uses a vertically operable movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) and power from a predetermined drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230). a force applying member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of receiving and actuating the movable member upward; having a first force acting member (e.g., boss 12405) and a second force acting member (e.g., boss 12407) configured such that the movement trajectory of the force acting member draws an arc when actuated upward; When the movable member is actuated upward, the first force acting member and the second force acting member are positioned so that the movement locus draws an arc and the movement direction is at least the horizontal direction (for example, the uppermost position). The first force acting member and the second force acting member move substantially in opposite directions when the first force acting member and the second force acting member move in the horizontal direction.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the moving direction of the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to a position where the moving direction is horizontal, the movable member is directed upward and the movable member is operated. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for holding the movable member in the upper position is added to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to keep adding to the load of the movable member in the upper position. It is possible to hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple structure without providing any support. This is because at a position where the moving direction of the movable member is horizontal, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotational direction of the force acting members (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). because it doesn't work.

Moreover, when the moving directions of the first force applying member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force applying member (for example, the boss 12407) are horizontal, the moving direction of the first force applying member and the second force applying member Since the movement direction of the member is substantially opposite, for example, even if an external force acts on the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) in any one direction, the movable member can be prevented from falling.

(2) In the amusement machine described in (1) above, the height direction position of the rotation center is the same and rotates in synchronization with each other, and a pair of substantially the same diameter first rotating members (for example, left driven gear 12404) and a second rotating member (e.g., right driven gear 12406), wherein said one force acting member (e.g., boss 12405) and said second force acting member (e.g., boss 12407) each: It is characterized in that it is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the first rotating member and the second rotating member by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the first force applying member (eg, boss 12405) is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the first rotating member (eg, left driven gear 12404) by a predetermined distance. Since the second force applying member (for example, boss 12407) is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the second rotating member (for example, right driven gear 12406), the first rotating member And the movable member can be held at the upper position with a simple structure that only rotates the second rotating member in the opposite direction.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 3-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can preferably hold the movable body in the upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-3]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of the win-lose judgment is displayed, an expectation effect is performed to make the player expect that the result of the win-lose judgment will be an advantageous result for the player, so that the effect of the win-lose judgment is enhanced. there is something

Examples of such an expectation effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a game machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique of moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

In recent years, the variation of production has been diversified. It is more preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body in the upper position.

However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when performing an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position after moving the movable body upward, the movable body is moved to the upper position. , it is necessary to continue applying a load to the motor that opposes the load of the movable body, or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like to hold the movable body in the upper position.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of holding a movable body in an upper position with a simple structure.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention includes a vertically operable movable member (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210), a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined a force acting member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source of the force acting member, wherein the force acting member moves the movable member upward is configured so that the movement trajectory of the force acting member includes a movement trajectory that draws an arc, and the predetermined drive source is positioned so that the movement direction of the force acting member is the horizontal direction. Alternatively, power is applied so that the force applying member moves to a substantially horizontal position exceeding the horizontal direction.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the moving direction of the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to a position where the moving direction is horizontal, the movable member is directed upward and the movable member is operated. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for holding the movable member in the upper position is added to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to keep adding to the load of the movable member in the upper position. It is possible to hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple structure without providing any support. This is because at a position where the moving direction of the movable member is horizontal, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotational direction of the force acting members (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). because it doesn't work.

Note that the number of force applying members (eg, bosses 12405 and 12407) is not limited to a specific number, and may be one or more than two. Also, the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member includes not only a perfect circular arc but also an elliptical arc. Furthermore, the arc drawn by the movement trajectory of the force application member does not need to have a constant curvature, and the curvature may change in the middle of the movement trajectory. Further, the movement trajectory of the force applying member may include a straight portion. In other words, in view of the gist of the present invention, it is sufficient if the movement direction of the force acting members can be the horizontal direction. is not necessarily limited to a particular arc, nor is the arc described by the movement trajectory of the force exerting member limited to a constant curvature.

(2) The game machine described in (1) above further includes a substantially circular rotating member (eg, left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406), and the force acting member (eg, bosses 12405, 12407) is , is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the rotating member by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the force applying member (for example, the bosses 12405 and 12407) is formed at a portion radially away from the center of rotation of the rotating member having a substantially perfect circle by a predetermined distance. It is possible to efficiently operate the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) upward with a simple configuration of only rotating the member.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 3-3, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of holding the movable body in the upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 4]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine is known in which a win-lose determination is performed in response to a winning at a starting hole, and when the result of the win-lose determination is a specific result, a jackpot game state is entered.

In this type of game machine, a big winning hole is provided in the right game area, and the big winning hole is opened when a big winning game state is reached. When the game ball hit into the right game area enters the big winning hole, it is detected by the count switch. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110483). Game balls that do not enter the big winning opening are discharged from the out opening.

However, even in the jackpot game state, not all game balls hit into the right game area enter the big winning hole, and such game balls are accepted in the out hole. People may feel disadvantageous and lose interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably suppress the decline in interest even if the game ball is not accepted in the big winning hole provided in the right game area. To provide a game machine capable of

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a game area (for example, game area 20) configured to allow game balls to flow down to a left area and a right area, and a game ball capable of being shot toward the game area. Launching means (eg, launching device 15), a starting port (eg, second starting port 440) provided in the left region that can accept a game ball, and a hit and drop based on acceptance of the game ball into the starting port Judgment means for making a judgment, a large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 540) provided in the right area, and acceptance of the game ball into the big winning opening based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a hit. and a game ball which is provided at the most downstream side of the game area and is not received in any of the winning openings including the starting opening and the big winning opening. and an out port (for example, an out port 55) that discharges the big winning game, even if the game ball fired toward the right side region during execution of the big winning game is not received in the big winning port Further comprising a guide member (e.g., game ball guide member 580) that guides the game ball that has not been received in the winning opening to the left area above the out opening and allows it to be received in the starting opening. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if the game ball launched toward the right side area is not accepted by the big winning hole, the game ball that was not accepted by the big winning hole moves above the out hole. It is led beyond to the left side area and can be received into the starting port. Therefore, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area is not received in the big winning hole, the expectation for the game ball is maintained and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (eg, second starting port 440) includes a movable member (eg, blade member 4620) that facilitates receiving a game ball into the starting port. ) is provided, and the game ball guided to the starting hole by the guiding member without being received in the big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 540) is always guided upstream of the starting hole. is.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game ball guided to the starting hole by the guiding member without being accepted by the big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 540) is always guided to the upstream of the starting hole. Even if the game ball shot toward the right side area is not received in the big winning hole, the expectation for the game ball can be continued for a long time until the end.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 4, even if the game ball is not received in the big winning hole provided in the right game area, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 4-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine is known in which a win-lose determination is performed in response to a winning at a starting hole, and when the result of the win-lose determination is a specific result, a jackpot game state is entered.

In this type of game machine, a big winning hole is provided in the right game area, and the big winning hole is opened when a big winning game state is reached. When the game ball hit into the right game area enters the big winning hole, it is detected by the count switch. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110483). Game balls that do not enter the big winning opening are discharged from the out opening.

However, even in the jackpot game state, not all game balls hit into the right game area enter the big winning hole, and such game balls are accepted in the out hole. People may feel disadvantageous and lose interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably suppress the decline in interest even if the game ball is not accepted in the big winning hole provided in the right game area. To provide a game machine capable of

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a game area (for example, game area 20) configured to allow game balls to flow down to a left area and a right area, and a game ball capable of being shot toward the game area. Launching means (e.g., launching device 15) and a starting port (e.g., second starting port 440) that operates a movable member (e.g., blade member 4620) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition to facilitate reception of game balls ), determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs hit/loss determination (for example, big hit determination processing in step S118) based on acceptance of a game ball into the start opening, and a large winning opening provided in the right side area (for example, , big winning hole 540) and a big winning game (for example, the big winning hole opening process of step S106) in which the acceptance of the game ball to the big winning hole is facilitated based on the result of the hit/loss determination ), and a game ball that is provided on the most downstream side of the game area and has not been received in any of the winning openings including the starting opening and the big winning opening. and an out port (for example, an out port 57) that discharges the above, and the game area has the above-mentioned A downstream path connecting the downstream side of the big winning opening and the out opening (for example, a downstream path connecting the exit side of the game ball guiding member 580 and the out opening 57) is formed, and the downstream side of the big winning opening is formed. The flow-down path connecting the out-port and the out-port allows a game ball that has flowed down the right side region but has not been received in the big winning port to be received in the starting port when the movable member is actuated. It is characterized in that it is configured to flow down toward the out port after passing through the acceptable region (for example, the second start port receiving region).

According to the gaming machine (1) above, the game ball that has flowed down the right area but has not been received by the big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 540) enters the out hole (for example, the out hole 55). On the way to it, it passes through the above-mentioned acceptable area (for example, the second starting opening accepting area). Therefore, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area is not received in the big winning hole, the expectation for the game ball is maintained and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (eg, second starting port 440) includes a movable member (eg, blade member 4620) that facilitates receiving a game ball into the starting port. ) is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the receivable area (for example, the second start opening receiving area) without being received by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is moved by the movable member. As long as the acceptance of the game ball into the starting hole is facilitated, it can be accepted by the starting hole.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game ball that has passed through the acceptable area (for example, the second starting opening receiving area) without being accepted by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is a movable member ( For example, as long as the reception of the game ball to the starting port is facilitated by the blade member 4620), it can be received by the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), so the game ball fired toward the right area Even if the game ball is not accepted in the big winning hole, the expectation for the game ball can be continued for a long time until the end.

Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 4-2, even if the game ball is not received in the big winning hole provided in the right game area, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest. .

[Appendix 4-3]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a win-lose determination is performed according to the winning at the first start port or the second start port, and when the result of the win-lose determination is a specific result, the game machine enters a jackpot game state. It has been known.

In this type of game machine, for example, the left game area is provided with a path along which the game ball rolls toward the first start opening. Among the game balls launched into the left game area, if there is a game ball that rolls along this path and heads for the first starting opening, it does not roll along this path (without winning a prize in the general winning opening). There are also game balls that are ejected from the out port (see, for example, FIG. 1 of JP-A-2011-092643).

However, in conventional gaming machines typified by the gaming machine described in JP-A-2011-092643, when the launched game ball does not roll along the path toward the first start port, Even if the game ball rolls along the path toward the first starting hole, if it is not accepted by the first starting hole, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be accepted by the out hole, so there is a risk that the interest will decrease at this point. There is

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suppress the decline in interest even if the game ball shot into the game area does not enter the first start hole. To provide a game machine capable of

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a game area (for example, game area 20) configured so that game balls can flow down, and a launching means (for example, a launching device) capable of shooting game balls toward the game area. 15), a first start port (for example, first start port 5442) that is provided in the game area and can accept a game ball, and a game ball to the first start port or the second start port Judgment means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs hit/lose judgment (for example, big hit judgment processing in step S118) based on, a big winning opening (for example, big winning opening 540) provided in the game area, and the result of the winning/losing judgment is a hit, a jackpot game executing means (for example, a jackpot game executing means (for example, main CPU 101), and an out port (for example, out port 57) that is provided on the most downstream side of the game area and discharges game balls that have not been received in any of the winning ports including the starting port and the big winning port. and a second starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) that can accept a game ball that has not been received by the first starting port before reaching the out port, and the game area is , the game ball that was desired to be received in the first starting port flows down toward the out port after passing through an acceptable area where it can be received in the second starting port when the movable member is actuated. It is characterized in that it is configured to

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the game ball that is not accepted by the first start port (eg, the first start port 5442) is reached by the out port (eg, the out port 55). It passes through an acceptable area (for example, a second starting opening receiving area) that allows reception to a second starting opening (for example, second starting opening 440). Therefore, even if the game ball launched toward the game area does not go to the path to the first starting port, or even if it goes to such a path but is not accepted by the first starting port, there is a sense of expectation for the game ball. It can be continued and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) includes a movable member (for example, , blade member 4620) is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the receivable area (for example, the second starting opening receiving area) without being received by the first starting opening is the second starting by the movable member As long as the reception of the game ball into the mouth is facilitated, it can be received in the second starting hole.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game ball that is not received by the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) and passes through the acceptable area (for example, the second starting port receiving area) is movable. As long as the reception of the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is facilitated by the member (eg, the blade member 4620), it can be received by the second starting port, Even if the game ball shot out is not received by the first starting port, the expectation for the game ball can be continued until the end.

Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 4-3, even if the game ball launched into the game area does not enter the first start hole, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest. .

[Appendix 5]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of hit/lose determination is displayed, a movable body presentation is performed to activate the movable body in order to make the player expect that the result of hit/lose determination is advantageous to the player. There are things that make it possible to raise

As such a movable body effect, for example, the movable body is moved by the expansion/contraction operation of the pantograph mechanism in which the link members and the link members are stacked in the front-rear direction, and the movable body is tilted at the same time when the expansion/contraction operation of the pantograph mechanism starts. The technology is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582).

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582, for example, since the link members overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the thickness of each link member must be reduced. As a result, there is a limit to enhancing the performance effect by the operation of the movable body, and there is a limit to further enhancing the interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to enhance the presentation effect of the movable body presentation to further enhance interest.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, the base member 1180 (more specifically, the central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and crosses the front-rear direction. A longitudinally elongated first longitudinal member (for example, upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) is operably connected to the first longitudinal member and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, a second longitudinal member (e.g., lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) elongated in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, wherein the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together; A game machine configured to be able to operate a predetermined accessory by pressing the first longitudinal member or the second longitudinal member, wherein any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member The rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (for example, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. between the frontmost position and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176) (for example, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176) and the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176). ) and the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of )).

(2) The game machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, the base member 1180 (more specifically, the central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and crosses the front-rear direction. A longitudinally elongated first longitudinal member (for example, upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) is operably connected to the first longitudinal member and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, a second longitudinal member (e.g., lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) elongated in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, wherein the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together; A game machine configured to be able to operate a predetermined accessory by pressing the first longitudinal member or the second longitudinal member, wherein any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member The rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (for example, the rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. (for example, the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)).

(3) The game machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, the base member 1180 (more specifically, the central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and crosses the front-rear direction. A longitudinally elongated first longitudinal member (for example, upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) is operably connected to the first longitudinal member and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, a second longitudinal member (e.g., lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) elongated in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, wherein the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together; A game machine configured to be able to operate a predetermined accessory by pressing the first longitudinal member or the second longitudinal member, wherein any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member The most forward position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (for example, the frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. (for example, the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)).

According to the gaming machines (1) to (3) above, the total thickness of the longitudinal members can be reduced without reducing the thickness of each longitudinal member (for example, each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178). It is possible to stack a plurality of accessories in the front-rear direction, and to increase the size of the movable accessories. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a more dynamic movable effect, and the game amusement by the movable effect can be enhanced more than ever. The "total thickness of the longitudinal members" does not mean the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member, but the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member that are the most forward in the front-rear direction. means the thickness from the position to the rearmost position. That is, it means a value obtained by subtracting the overlapping thickness of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member from the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above, the one longitudinal member includes the upper end of the longitudinal portion of the one longitudinal member (for example, the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174 ( An extension (for example, an extension 11741 (extension 11781)) extending beyond the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178 is formed, and is connected to another longitudinal member at the extension. characterized by being

According to the game machine of (4) above, one longitudinal member and the other longitudinal member ( For example, it is possible to increase the operating range of upper left arm 1172 and lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178).

In this manner, according to the invention described in Appendix 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the movable body presentation and further enhance the interest.

[Appendix 5-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of hit/lose determination is displayed, a movable body presentation is performed to activate the movable body in order to make the player expect that the result of hit/lose determination is advantageous to the player. There are things that make it possible to raise

As a game machine of this kind, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, a pair of left and right movable bodies are connected to synchronous arms, respectively, and a single motor is used to operate the synchronous arms. A movable accessory device is disclosed that moves the body in the approaching/separating direction.

However, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, the player can visually recognize the synchronizing arm connected to the movable body, and the player's interest in the movable body presentation fades and the interest decreases. I could have lost it.

In recent years, a game machine has been disclosed in which a connecting member (for example, a support member that supports the movable accessory) that is connected to the movable accessory is hidden behind the movable accessory. In this case, the arrangement and movement of the movable accessory are restricted, and the original interest of the movable accessory may be lost, and no fundamental solution has been reached.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suppress the decrease in interest by suitably making it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member connected to the movable accessory.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covering decorative body 1120) that can be operated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a predetermined base member, and the movable accessory. When the movable object moves from a first position (for example, the origin position) to a second position (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 at the operation limit position), the movable role a connecting member (e.g., lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) that operates by changing its posture in accordance with the action of the object, and the connecting member allows the movable accessory to move between the first position and the first position. 2, it becomes difficult to see in front view even if the posture is changed in the specific area behind the movable accessory (for example, the back of the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). wherein the movable part is a main movable part (for example, a movable decorative body 1110) operable beyond the second position, and the main part is movable beyond the second position. A secondary movable accessory (e.g., a covering ornament) that makes the connecting member difficult to see in a front view by operating so as to be positioned in front of the connecting member that changes its posture beyond the specific area when activated. 1120).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the movable accessory is between the first position and the second position, it is assumed that the connecting member changes its posture due to the operation of the movable accessory. However, since the posture of the connecting member only changes within a specific area behind the movable accessory, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member when viewed from the front. When the main movable accessory moves beyond the second position, the auxiliary movable accessory operates so as to be positioned in front of the connecting member, although the connecting member changes its posture beyond the specific region. Therefore, even in such a case, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member when viewed from the front. As a result, the connection member can be suitably made difficult to see without restricting the arrangement and movement of the main character, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the connection member (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) is connected to the movable accessory (eg, movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120). Actuating from the first position (e.g., origin position) toward the second position (e.g., upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176 operating limit positions) results in vertical movement between the horizontal and vertical directions. It is an arm-shaped member that changes its posture in a direction.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the connecting member is an arm-shaped member that changes its posture between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, the connecting member can be suitably used while increasing the operating range of the movable accessory. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the arm-shaped member is a first arm-shaped member (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178), and one end is the predetermined base member A second arm-shaped member (eg, upper left arm 1172, upper right arm 1176) attached to the (eg, base member 1180) side and having the other end connected to the first arm-shaped member side Further, the second arm-shaped member is configured so that the movable accessory (eg, movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) moves from a first position (eg, origin position) to a second position (eg, upper left part). When operated toward the operation limit position of the arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176, the posture is changed in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and at least the movable accessory is in the second position. When viewed from the front, it can be visually recognized, and the part that can be visually recognized from the front is made of a transparent member.

In the game machine of (3) above, the second arm-shaped member, which cannot be completely hidden in a front view when the movable accessory is operated beyond the second position even with the operation of the secondary movable accessory, is provided from the front. It is made of a transparent member so that it is difficult to see.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 5-2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by suitably making it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member connected to the movable accessory.

[Appendix 6]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, there is a game machine in which a movable accessory is operated to enhance the performance effect as an expectation performance for making the player expect that the result of the win-lose determination is advantageous.

A game machine in which a movable accessory is activated to enhance the performance effect is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-76208, in order to operate the plurality of movable accessories, a plurality of motors are provided to operate each of the plurality of movable accessories.

However, in recent years, there has been an increasing demand for productions using movable accessories, such as productions using more movable accessories and productions using large-sized movable accessories. Space must be reserved and control must not be complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine which has a simple configuration and which enables independent operation of a plurality of movable accessories. be.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is a main object (for example, movable decoration 1110) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by one operation control from a predetermined drive source (for example, left motor 1151, right motor 1161). Then, the main object is rotatably supported at one fulcrum (for example, holes 11102 and 11106), and the main object is not controlled by any power source including the predetermined drive source. A subsidiary object (for example, covered decorative bodies 1120 and 1124) that can be operated following the operation, and a restricting means (for example, a pantograph mechanism 1170) that regulates the operation of the subsidiary object that follows the operation of the main object. wherein, when the restricting means regulates the operation of following the main object, the secondary object separates from the main object by rotating with respect to the main object about the one fulcrum. One operation control from the predetermined drive source to the main object (for example, one operation control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise It is characterized in that the main object and the secondary object can be operated independently of each other only by one operation control such as only rotating.

According to the game machine of (1) above, one motion control from a predetermined drive source to the main character (for example, one motion control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise) The main object and the secondary object can perform different operations independently of each other with only one motion control such as only rotating the main object. In other words, the main object (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) and the secondary object can be controlled simply by performing one motion control for one drive source without providing a power source for driving each of the main object and the subsidiary object. (eg, covering ornaments 1120, 1124) can be operated independently. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the secondary objects (eg, covering decorations 1120 and 1124) follow the operation of the main object (eg, movable decoration 1110) by gravitational action. As well as being actuated, the restricting means (eg, pantograph mechanism 1170) restricts the actuation of the accessory by the action of gravity.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since a natural force such as the action of gravity is used to operate the secondary role (for example, the covering ornament 1120), the driving source for operating the secondary role is This can contribute to space saving and simplification of configuration and control.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the regulating means has a longitudinal member (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) connected to the accessory, and The member is positioned behind the main object and/or the secondary object, and is oriented vertically between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (lower arm 1174) as the secondary object is actuated. , 1178) changes, and when the attitude of the elongated member changes beyond a certain range, the subsidiary object operates so as to be positioned in front of the elongated member, and the It is constructed so as not to be exposed from behind the main character and/or the secondary character.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the attitude of the elongated member (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) changes beyond a certain range, the auxiliary arm is positioned in front of the elongated member. Since the accessories (for example, the covering decorations 1120 and 1124) are actuated, it is possible to prevent the elongated members from being exposed behind the main role (movable decoration 1110) and the secondary role.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 6, it is possible to provide a game machine with a simple configuration that allows a plurality of movable accessories to be operated independently of each other.

[Appendix 6-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, there is a game machine in which a movable accessory is operated to enhance the performance effect as an expectation performance for making the player expect that the result of the win-lose determination is advantageous.

A gaming machine in which a movable accessory is activated to enhance the performance effect is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, the movement of the movable role in the vertical direction is performed by linear motion in the vertical direction by drive mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable role.

However, as in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, by actuating the movable role by linear motion in the vertical direction by the drive mechanism provided on both sides of the movable role, Although the operating range of the movable accessory can be increased, a large area is required for the installation space of the drive mechanism.

In recent years, game machines have been proposed in which the installation space for the drive mechanism is reduced by actuating the movable accessory by arcuate motion, but such a drive mechanism cannot move the movable accessory in a straight line. .

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make it possible to linearly move a movable accessory over a wider operating range while reducing the installation space of the drive mechanism. To provide a game machine to play.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes hit/lose determination means (e.g., main CPU 101 that performs steps S118 and S119) that performs hit/lose determination (e.g., hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; A display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing a predetermined display based on the determination result, and a specific game that is advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. Based on the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the big winning opening opening process in step S106) and the result of the hit/loss determination, a movable accessory (for example, a movable ornament 1110), a first arm (eg, left transmission arm 1154) and a second arm (eg, right transmission arm 1164) that support the movable accessory from both sides, and a predetermined drive source (eg, left motor 1151 , right motor 1161) to the first arm (e.g., left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) and a second drive transmission member to transmit to the second arm. (for example, a right arm member 1165, a driven gear 1166, and a drive gear 1167), and the first drive transmission member and the second drive transmission member are respectively on both sides of the display means in front view, and the movable accessory and supports one end of each of the first arm and the second arm, and the one end of the first arm and the second arm serves as a fulcrum The movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides at the other end while performing the circular motion.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the first arm (eg, left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (eg, right transmission arm 1164) perform arc motion with one end as the fulcrum. and the other end slidably supports the movable accessory from both sides. Therefore, the installation space for the first drive transmission member (eg, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) and the second drive transmission member (eg, right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, drive gear 1167) can be made movable. The movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while being within a smaller operating range than the object (for example, the movable decoration 1110).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is controlled by a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). For example, one motion control for the left motor 1151 to rotate counterclockwise, and one motion control for the right motor 1161 to rotate clockwise) can be operated in a predetermined direction (for example, a movable decoration). (body 1110) and a secondary object (for example, covered decorative bodies 1120, 1124), and when the secondary object is restricted from following the main object by the action of gravity, it rotates about the one fulcrum with respect to the main object. By doing so, an operation different from that of the main character is performed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, one operation control (for example, the left motor 1151 is With only one action control such as counterclockwise rotation and one action control such that the right motor 1161 only rotates clockwise), the main object (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) and the secondary object (for example, the covering decoration) The bodies 1120, 1124) can perform different actions independently of each other. That is, by actuating the sub-function using natural force such as gravity, one motion control can be performed for one drive source without providing power sources corresponding to the main and sub-functions respectively. , it is possible to cause the main and subsidiary objects to perform different operations independently. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(3) In the game machine described in (2) above, the actuation of the secondary objects (eg, covering decorations 1120, 1124) following the main object (eg, movable decoration 1110) is restricted by the action of gravity. Further comprising an elongated member (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) positioned behind the main character or/and the minor character and at the side of the minor character. Along with the operation, the posture (the direction in which the lower arms 1174 and 1178 face) changes in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. When over ranged, it operates to locate in front of the elongated member.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the attitude of the elongated member (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) changes beyond a certain range, the auxiliary arm is positioned in front of the elongated member. Since the accessories (for example, the covering decorations 1120 and 1124) are actuated, it is possible to prevent the elongated members from being exposed behind the main role (movable decoration 1110) and the secondary role.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 6-2, the movable accessory can be linearly moved in a wider operating range while saving the installation space of the drive mechanism.

[Appendix 6-3]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, there is a game machine in which a movable accessory is operated to enhance the performance effect as an expectation performance for making the player expect that the result of the win-lose determination is advantageous.

As a game machine of this type, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208 discloses a movable accessory device in which a movable body is operated by operating a synchronization arm connected to the movable body. (See, eg, FIG. 16). Further, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-67739 discloses a gaming machine in which a driving mechanism for driving a movable body is hidden behind the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 33-8).

For example, according to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when the movable body is operated, the synchronization arm can be visually recognized by the player, which may reduce interest.

Further, for example, according to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-67739, although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the driving mechanism that drives the movable body, the driving mechanism is prevented from being exposed from the back surface of the movable body. Therefore, the arrangement and movement of the movable body may be restricted.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suppress the decrease in interest that can occur due to the player being able to see the connecting member connected to the movable accessory. to do.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is operable on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition, and has a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covered decorative body 1120) with decorations on the front surface, and a predetermined and a drive transmission support member (for example, drive transmission arms 1154, 1164 ), and a decorative member (for example, decorative covers 1130, 1140) provided between the predetermined drive source and the drive transmission support member and having the same decoration as the movable accessory on the front surface. The drive transmission support member is provided between the movable accessory and the decorative member so that it can be visually recognized in a front view, and the front surface is decorated with the same type of decoration as the movable accessory and the decorative member. and the movable accessory and the decorative member are configured to maintain continuity with each other.

According to the game machine of (1) above, on the front surface of the drive transmission support member (eg, drive transmission arms 1154, 1164), movable accessories (eg, movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) and decorative members ( For example, the same type of decoration as the decorative covers 1130, 1140) is applied to the front surface, thereby maintaining continuity between the drive transmission support member, the movable accessories, and the decorative member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the player being able to visually recognize the drive transmission support member connected to the movable accessory. That is, the present invention is different from the conventional idea of making it difficult for the player to see the member (corresponding to the drive transmission support member of the present invention) that supports or connects the movable accessory. The focus is on how to make the player not aware of such movable accessories while making them visible to the player. It is assimilated with the members of

(2) In the game machine described in (1) above, the drive transmission support members (drive transmission arms 1154 and 1164) are arranged such that the movable parts (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) The front surface is decorated so that continuity with the movable accessory and the decorative member is maintained regardless of the operating range of the object.

According to the game machine of (2) above, even when the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is activated, the drive transmission support member and the movable accessory and the decorative member are connected continuously. Since the performance is maintained, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be conscious of the drive transmission support member due to the operation of the movable accessory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, at least the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) and the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arms 1154 and 1164) and the decorative members (decorative covers 1130 and 1140) form one character shape.

According to the game machine of (3) above, at least the movable accessories (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120), the drive transmission support members (drive transmission arms 1154 and 1164) and the decorative members (decorative covers 1130 and 1140 ) is decorated with the same type of decoration on the front surface, and these form the same character shape, so the drive transmission support member can be combined with other surrounding members such as movable accessories and decorative members. can be more assimilated.

As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 6-3, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the player being able to visually recognize the connecting member that is connected to the movable accessory.

[Appendix 7]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine in which a hit/lose determination is performed and an effect image corresponding to the result of the hit/lose determination is displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Among gaming machines of this type, for example, there is known a gaming machine that displays, at a predetermined probability, a warning image (ready-to-win warning) indicating that a ready-to-win effect display mode will be displayed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-200274). reference). In this way, by displaying the preview image to the effect that the ready-to-win announcement will be performed, it is possible to improve the visual presentation effect, and by extension, to improve the interest in the ready-to-win announcement.

However, the amount of information displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display is extremely large, including the reach advance notice information, and there is a risk that the player will miss important information related to the progress of the game. Especially in recent years, in order to liven up the game interest, the frequency of reach notices has been increased and the presentation itself has become flashy, so this tendency is remarkable.

In addition, the player gets bored with just looking at the display displayed on the display device such as the liquid crystal display. In recent years, in addition to effects performed on display devices such as liquid crystal displays, effects using movable accessories have been performed. The player has to pay attention to both the presentation and the presentation by the movable accessories, which places a heavy burden on the player.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that can easily convey important information related to the progress of a game to a player without unnecessarily increasing the burden on the player. to provide.

(1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display is attached to the front surface, and the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second 2 movable body 1340), determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S118 and S119) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the hit/lose determination a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying information related to the progress of the game (e.g., information suggesting execution of a specific reach with a high probability of winning a big hit), wherein the first movable body and the Each of the display bodies attached to the second movable body does not show information related to the progress of the game by itself, but the display body attached to the first movable body and the display body attached to the second movable body When the display body is arranged side by side, it can show information related to the progress of the game (for example, information suggesting execution of a specific reach with a high expectation of a big hit), and the first movable that is arranged so as to be difficult to see when viewed from the front. The body and the second movable body are configured so as to be movable in a direction approaching each other in front of the display means from a position separated from each other and outside the field of view in a front view based on the result of the collision determination. 2. Information relating to the progress of the game can be displayed by means of display bodies provided on the front surfaces of the respective devices when the devices are moved in the direction of approaching each other.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the first movable body (eg, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (eg, the second movable body 1340) are separated from each other outside the field of view in a front view. It is possible to shift the player's gaze from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body by moving from the position in the direction in which they approach each other in front of the display means. Since the display bodies attached to the first movable body and the second movable body do not individually indicate information related to the progress of the game, when they are positioned outside the field of view and apart from each other when viewed from the front , the player's gaze tends to turn to the display means rather than the first movable body and the second movable body. However, when the display body attached to the first movable body and the display body attached to the second movable body are arranged side by side, information related to the progress of the game (for example, information suggesting execution of a specific reach with a high expectation of a big hit) , it is thought that the player's gaze shifts from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body by moving toward each other in front of the display means. Further, for example, since the player is not required to gaze at both the display means and the first movable body and the second movable body, there is little risk of unnecessarily increasing the burden on the player. important information related to the progress of the game can be easily conveyed to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first movable body (eg, first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (eg, second movable body 1340) are provided with a predetermined base member ( For example, a linear slope (for example, slopes 13307 and 13407) is formed along the movement direction on the side facing the predetermined base member while being attached to the rear box 1800). is characterized by a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the first movable body (eg, first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (eg, second movable body 1340) are provided with a predetermined base member (eg, rear box). 1800), linear slopes (e.g., slopes 13307 and 13407) are formed along the moving direction, and these linear slopes rise from both longitudinal sides toward the center. Because of the mold shape, smooth transition between the first movable body and the second movable body can be achieved.

Thus, according to the invention described in Supplementary Note 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a simple configuration and can easily convey important information related to the progress of a game to a player without unnecessarily increasing the burden on the player. be able to.

All the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the gist of the invention. can.

1 pachinko machine 1110 movable decorative body 1120 covering decorative body 1180 base member 1170 pantograph mechanism 1190 regulating member 1172 upper left arm 1174 lower left arm 1176 upper right arm 1178 lower right arm

Claims (1)

a predetermined base member;
a movable accessory that can be moved from an initial position to a predetermined position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a connecting member that operates by changing its posture in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory when the movable accessory operates toward the predetermined position;
with
The connecting member includes a first connecting portion connected to the movable accessory and a second connecting portion connected to the predetermined base member,
The first connecting part is configured to be difficult to see in front view even if the posture is changed in the specific area until the movable accessory moves to the predetermined position,
The movable accessory is
a first movable part;
a second movable part operable when the first movable part is actuated,
The second movable part is operable so that the first connecting part is difficult to see in a front view when the first connecting part changes its posture beyond the specific region, and the second connecting part is movable. is operable so that at least part of the part is difficult to see in a front view,
The first movable part has different visible regions in front view depending on whether the second movable part is in a non-operating state or in an operating state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images